Handleiding Icom IC-7800 (pagina 5 van 206) (Engels)

12376

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/206

Pagina verder

THE TRANSCEIVER

i7800

Instruction Manual

A-6328H-1EX-r

Printed in Japan

FOREWORD

Congratulations! You are the owner of the world’s most advanced amateur

HF/50 MHz transceiver— IC-7800. The IC-7800 is designed and built with

Icom’s superior technology and craftsmanship. With proper care, this prod-

uct should provide you with years of trouble-free operation.

We would like to take a few moments of your time to thank you for making

the IC-7800 your radio of choice, and hope you agree with Icom’s philoso-

phy of “technology first.” Many hours of research and development went

into the design of your IC-7800.

FEATURES

❍ Ultimate receiver performance: third-order intercept (IP3)

of +40 dBm (HF bands only), both main and sub

❍ Independent identical receiver circuits for main and sub

bands provide perfect no-compromise Dualwatch operation

❍ Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK31 modulator/demodulator

and direct PC keyboard connection capability for RTTY

and PSK31 operation without a PC

❍ Upgraded real-time spectrum scope— center frequency

and fix frequency modes, plus mini-scope displays

IMPORTANT

READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before at-

tempting to operate the transceiver.

SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains im-

portant safety and operating instructions for the IC-7800.

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS

TRADEMARKS

Icom, Icom Inc. and the logo are registered trademarks of Icom

Incorporated (Japan) in the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany,

France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries.

WORD DEFINITION

WARNING

Personal injury, fire hazard or electric shock may

occur.

CAUTION Equipment damage may occur.

NOTE

If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk of person-

al injury, fire or electric shock.

PRECAUTIONS

R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER

attach an antenna or internal antenna connector during

transmission. This may result in an electrical shock or

burn.

R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver

with a headset or other audio accessories at high vol-

ume levels. Hearing experts advise against continuous

high volume operation. If you experience a ringing in

your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use.

R CAUTION! NEVER change the internal set-

tings of the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver

performance and/or damage to the transceiver.

In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits,

such as output power, idling current, etc., might dam-

age the expensive final devices.

The transceiver warranty does not cover any problems

caused by unauthorized internal adjustment.

R CAUTION! NEVER touch the transceiver top

cover when transmitting continuously for long periods.

The top cover may be hot.

R CAUTION! The transceiver weighs approx. 25 kg

(55 lb). Always have two people available to carry, lift

or turn over the transceiver.

R CAUTION! The line-voltage receptacle must be

near the transceiver and must be easily accessible.

Avoid extension cords.

R ACHTUNG! Die Steckdose muß nabe bei

diesem Gerät angebracht und zugänglich sein.

R NEVER let metal, wire or other objects protrude

into the transceiver or into connectors on the rear

panel. This may result in an electric shock.

R NEVER block any cooling vents on the top, rear

or bottom of the transceiver.

R NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow or

any liquids.

R NEVER install the transceiver in a place without

adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation may be reduced,

and the transceiver may be damaged.

R NEVER operate or touch the transceiver with wet

hands. This may result in an electric shock or damage

to the transceiver.

DO NOT

use chemical agents such as benzine or al-

cohol when cleaning the IC-7800, as they can damage

the transceiver’s surfaces.

DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don’t actu-

ally desire to transmit.

AVOID using or storing the transceiver in areas with

temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C

(+122°F).

AVOID placing the transceiver in excessively dusty en-

vironments or in direct sunlight.

AVOID placing the transceiver against walls or putting

anything on top of the transceiver. This may overheat

the transceiver.

Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-

tent use by children.

BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the

transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear

amplifier’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear

amplifier will be damaged.

Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional).

Other manufacturers’ microphones have different pin

assignments, and connection to the IC-7800 may dam-

age the transceiver or microphone.

The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that

appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a mal-

function or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD

displays.

During maritime mobile operation, keep the transceiver

and microphone as far away as possible from the mag-

netic navigation compass to prevent erroneous indica-

tions.

Turn [I/O] switch (on the rear panel) OFF and/or dis-

connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when

you will not use the transceiver for long period of time.

For U.S.A. only

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device,

not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your

authority to operate this device under FCC regulations.

q AC power cable* ………………………………… 1

w Antenna jumper cables …………………………… 2

e Rack mounting handles ……………………… 1 pair

r Screws for rack mounting handles ………… 1 set

t CF (Compact Flash) memory card ……………… 1

y Stands ………………………………………… 1 pair

u Spare fuse (FGB 2 A) …………………………… 1

i RCA plugs ………………………………………… 2

o DC power plug …………………………………… 1

!0 2-conductor

⁄

″ plugs …………………………… 3

!1 3-conductor

⁄

″ plugs …………………………… 2

!2 3-conductor

⁄

″ plugs …………………………… 3

!3 ACC plugs (7-pin) ………………………………… 2

!4 ACC plugs (8-pin) ………………………………… 2

!5 Antenna connector caps ………………………… 4

*May differ from that shown according to version

iii

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

Section 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Front panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-2

■ Rear panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-12

■ LCD display …………………………………………………………… 1-14

■ Screen menu arrangement …………………………………………… 1-15

Section 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Unpacking ……………………………………………………………… 2-2

■ Antenna jumper cable connection …………………………………… 2-2

■ Selecting a location …………………………………………………… 2-2

■ Rack mounting handle attachment …………………………………… 2-2

■ Grounding ……………………………………………………………… 2-3

■ Antenna connection …………………………………………………… 2-3

■ CF (Compact Flash) memory card …………………………………… 2-3

■ Required connections ………………………………………………… 2-4

D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-4

D Rear panel …………………………………………………………… 2-4

■ Advanced connections ………………………………………………… 2-5

D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-5

D Rear panel—1 ……………………………………………………… 2-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

!1 !2 !3 !4 !5

yuio

D Rear panel—2 ……………………………………………………… 2-6

■ Linear amplifier connections …………………………………………… 2-7

D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO …………………………………… 2-7

D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier …………………………… 2-7

■ Transverter jack information …………………………………………… 2-8

■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ………………………………… 2-8

■ Microphone connector information …………………………………… 2-9

■ Microphones (options) ………………………………………………… 2-9

D SM-20 ………………………………………………………………… 2-9

D HM-36 ………………………………………………………………… 2-9

■ Accessory connector information …………………………………… 2-10

Section 3 BASIC OPERATIONS

■ When first applying power (CPU resetting) ………………………… 3-2

■ Initial settings …………………………………………………………… 3-2

■ Main/Sub band selection ……………………………………………… 3-3

■ Selecting VFO/memory mode ………………………………………… 3-3

■ Selecting an operating band …………………………………………… 3-4

D Using the band stacking registers ………………………………… 3-4

■ Frequency setting ……………………………………………………… 3-5

D Tuning with the main dial …………………………………………… 3-5

D Direct frequency entry with the keypad …………………………… 3-5

D Quick tuning step …………………………………………………… 3-6

D Selecting “kHz” step ………………………………………………… 3-6

⁄4 tuning step function ……………………………………………… 3-6

D Selecting 1 Hz step ………………………………………………… 3-7

D Auto tuning step function …………………………………………… 3-7

D Band edge warning beep …………………………………………… 3-7

■ Operating mode selection ……………………………………………… 3-8

■ Volume setting ………………………………………………………… 3-9

■ RF gain adjustment …………………………………………………… 3-9

■ Squelch level adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-9

■ Meter indication selection …………………………………………… 3-10

D Multi-function digital meter ………………………………………… 3-10

D Meter type selection ……………………………………………… 3-11

■ Basic transmit operation ……………………………………………… 3-12

D Transmitting ………………………………………………………… 3-12

D Microphone gain adjustment ……………………………………… 3-12

D Drive gain adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-13

Section 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Operating SSB ………………………………………………………… 4-2

D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-2

D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-3

D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) …………………4-3

■ Operating CW …………………………………………………………… 4-4

D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-4

D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-5

D About CW reverse mode ……………………………………………4-5

D About CW pitch control ………………………………………………4-5

D CW side tone function ………………………………………………4-5

D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation …………………………………4-6

D About 137 kHz band operation (Europe, UK, Italy, Spain, France

versions only) …………………………………………………………4-6

■ Electronic keyer functions ……………………………………………… 4-7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

D Memory keyer screen …………………………………………………4-8

D Editing a memory keyer ………………………………………………4-9

D Contest number set mode …………………………………………4-10

D Keyer set mode ………………………………………………………4-11

■ Operating RTTY (FSK) ……………………………………………… 4-13

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-14

D About RTTY reverse mode …………………………………………4-14

D Twin peak filter ………………………………………………………4-14

D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication ………………………4-15

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-15

D RTTY memory transmission ………………………………………4-16

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-16

D Editing RTTY memory ………………………………………………4-17

D RTTY decode set mode ……………………………………………4-18

D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-20

■ Operating PSK ………………………………………………………… 4-21

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-22

D About BPSK and QPSK mode ……………………………………4-22

D Functions for the PSK decoder indication ………………………4-23

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-23

D PSK memory transmission …………………………………………4-24

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-24

D Editing PSK memory ………………………………………………4-25

D PSK decode set mode ………………………………………………4-26

D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-28

■ Operating AM ………………………………………………………… 4-29

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-29

D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-30

■ Operating FM ………………………………………………………… 4-31

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-31

D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-31

■ Repeater operation …………………………………………………… 4-32

D Repeater tone frequency setting …………………………………4-32

■ Tone squelch operation ……………………………………………… 4-33

■ Data mode (AFSK) operation ………………………………………… 4-34

Section 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ Spectrum scope screen ……………………………………………… 5-2

D Center mode ………………………………………………………… 5-2

D Fix mode ……………………………………………………………… 5-3

D Mini scope screen indication ……………………………………… 5-4

D Scope set mode ……………………………………………………… 5-4

■ Preamplifier ……………………………………………………………… 5-9

■ Attenuator ……………………………………………………………… 5-9

■ RIT function …………………………………………………………… 5-10

D RIT monitor function …………………………………………………5-10

■ AGC function …………………………………………………………… 5-11

D Selecting the preset value …………………………………………5-11

D Adjusting the AGC time constant …………………………………5-11

D Setting the AGC time constant preset value ………………………5-11

■ Twin PBT operation …………………………………………………… 5-12

■ IF filter selection ……………………………………………………… 5-13

D IF filter selection …………………………………………………… 5-13

D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) ……………… 5-13

D Roofing filter selection ……………………………………………… 5-14

TABLE OF CONTENTS

D DSP filter shape …………………………………………………… 5-14

D Filter shape set mode ……………………………………………… 5-14

■ Dualwatch operation ………………………………………………… 5-16

■ Noise blanker ………………………………………………………… 5-17

D NB set mode ………………………………………………………… 5-17

■ Noise reduction ………………………………………………………… 5-18

■ Dial lock function ……………………………………………………… 5-18

■ Notch function ………………………………………………………… 5-19

■ Digital selector ………………………………………………………… 5-19

Section 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

■ VOX function …………………………………………………………… 6-2

D Using the VOX function …………………………………………… 6-2

D Adjusting the VOX function ………………………………………… 6-2

D VOX set mode ……………………………………………………… 6-2

■ Break-in function ………………………………………………………… 6-3

D Semi break-in operation …………………………………………… 6-3

D Full break-in operation ……………………………………………… 6-3

■ ∂TX function …………………………………………………………… 6-4

D ∂TX monitor function ………………………………………………… 6-4

■ Monitor function ………………………………………………………… 6-4

■ Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) ……………………………… 6-5

■ Speech compressor (SSB only) ……………………………………… 6-5

■ Split frequency operation ……………………………………………… 6-6

■ Quick split function ……………………………………………………… 6-7

D Split lock function …………………………………………………… 6-7

Section 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

■ About digital voice recorder …………………………………………… 7-2

■ Recording a received audio …………………………………………… 7-3

D Basic recording ……………………………………………………… 7-3

D One-touch recording ………………………………………………… 7-3

■ Playing the recorded audio …………………………………………… 7-4

D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-4

D One-touch playing …………………………………………………… 7-4

■ Protect the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5

■ Erasing the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5

■ Recording a message for transmit …………………………………… 7-6

D Recording …………………………………………………………… 7-6

D Confirming a message for transmit ………………………………… 7-6

■ Programming a memory name ……………………………………… 7-7

■ Sending a recorded message ………………………………………… 7-8

D Transmit level setting ……………………………………………… 7-8

■ Voice set mode ………………………………………………………… 7-9

■ Saving a voice memory into the CF card …………………………… 7-10

D Saving the received audio memory ……………………………… 7-10

D Saving the TX memory …………………………………………… 7-10

Section 8 MEMORY OPERATION

■ Memory channels ……………………………………………………… 8-2

■ Memory channel selection …………………………………………… 8-2

D Using the [Y]/[Z] keys ……………………………………………… 8-2

D Using the keypad …………………………………………………… 8-2

■ Memory list screen ……………………………………………………… 8-3

D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen …… 8-3

D Confirming programmed memory channels ……………………… 8-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

■ Memory channel programming ……………………………………… 8-4

D Programming in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-4

D Programming in memory mode …………………………………… 8-4

■ Frequency transferring ………………………………………………… 8-5

D Transferring in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-5

D Transferring in memory mode ……………………………………… 8-5

■ Memory names ………………………………………………………… 8-6

D Editing (programming) memory names …………………………… 8-6

■ Memory clearing ………………………………………………………… 8-6

■ Memo pads ……………………………………………………………… 8-7

D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads …… 8-7

D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad ………………………… 8-7

Section 9 SCANS

■ Scan types ……………………………………………………………… 9-2

■ Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 9-2

■ Voice squelch control function ………………………………………… 9-3

■ Scan set mode ………………………………………………………… 9-3

■ Programmed scan operation ………………………………………… 9-4

■ ∂F scan operation ……………………………………………………… 9-4

■ Fine programmed scan/∂F scan ……………………………………… 9-5

■ Memory scan operation ………………………………………………… 9-6

■ Select memory scan operation ……………………………………… 9-6

■ Setting select memory channels ……………………………………… 9-7

D Setting in scan screen ……………………………………………… 9-7

D Setting in memory list screen ……………………………………… 9-7

D Erasing the select scan setting …………………………………… 9-7

■ Tone scan ……………………………………………………………… 9-8

Section 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

■ Antenna connection and selection ………………………………… 10-2

■ Antenna memory settings …………………………………………… 10-3

D Antenna type selection …………………………………………… 10-3

D Temporary memory ………………………………………………… 10-4

D Antenna selection mode …………………………………………… 10-4

■ Antenna tuner operation ……………………………………………… 10-5

D Tuner operation …………………………………………………… 10-5

D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna …………………………… 10-6

Section 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS

■ Time set mode ………………………………………………………… 11-2

■ Daily timer setting ……………………………………………………… 11-3

■ Setting sleep timer …………………………………………………… 11-4

■ Timer operation ………………………………………………………… 11-4

Section 12 SET MODE

■ Set mode description ………………………………………………… 12-2

D Set mode operation ………………………………………………… 12-2

D Screen arrangement ……………………………………………… 12-3

■ Level set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-4

■ ACC set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-6

■ Display set mode …………………………………………………… 12-11

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode ………………………………… 12-14

■ CF card set menu …………………………………………………… 12-22

D CF card set screen arrangement ……………………………… 12-22

D Save option set mode …………………………………………… 12-23

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

viii

D Load option set mode …………………………………………… 12-24

■ File saving …………………………………………………………… 12-25

■ File loading …………………………………………………………… 12-26

■ Changing the file name ……………………………………………… 12-27

■ Deleting a file ………………………………………………………… 12-28

■ Formatting the CF card ……………………………………………… 12-28

Section 13 MAINTENANCE

■ Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………… 13-2

D Transceiver power ………………………………………………… 13-2

D Transmit and receive ……………………………………………… 13-2

D Scanning …………………………………………………………… 13-3

D Display ……………………………………………………………… 13-3

■ Main dial brake adjustment ………………………………………… 13-3

■ Voice synthesizer operation ………………………………………… 13-3

■ SWR reading …………………………………………………………… 13-4

■ Screen type and font selections …………………………………… 13-4

■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ……………………………… 13-5

■ Opening the transceiver’s case ……………………………………… 13-6

■ Clock backup battery replacement ………………………………… 13-6

■ Fuse replacement …………………………………………………… 13-7

■ Resetting the CPU …………………………………………………… 13-7

■ About protection indications ………………………………………… 13-8

■ Screen saver function ………………………………………………… 13-8

Section 14 CONTROL COMMAND

■ Remote jack (CI-V) information ……………………………………… 14-2

D CI-V connection example ………………………………………… 14-2

D Data format ………………………………………………………… 14-2

D Command table …………………………………………………… 14-9

D To send/read memory contents …………………………………… 14-9

D Band stacking register …………………………………………… 14-9

D Codes for memory keyer contents ……………………………… 14-9

D Codes for memory name, opening message

and clock 2 name contents ……………………………………… 14-9

D Offset frequency setting ………………………………………… 14-10

D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting ………………… 14-10

D SSB transmission passband width setting …………………… 14-10

D Color setting ……………………………………………………… 14-10

D Bandscope edge frequency setting …………………………… 14-10

D Data mode with filter width setting ……………………………… 14-10

D Antenna memory setting ………………………………………… 14-10

Section 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

■ Specifications ………………………………………………………… 15-2

D General ……………………………………………………………… 15-2

D Transmitter ………………………………………………………… 15-2

D Receiver …………………………………………………………… 15-3

D Antenna tuner ……………………………………………………… 15-3

■ Options ………………………………………………………………… 15-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

■ General ………………………………………………………………… 16-2

■ Caution ………………………………………………………………… 16-2

■ Preparation …………………………………………………………… 16-3

D Firmware and firm utility …………………………………………… 16-3

D File downloading …………………………………………………… 16-3

■ Firmware update— CF memory card ……………………………… 16-4

■ Firmware update— PC ……………………………………………… 16-6

D Connections ………………………………………………………… 16-6

D IP address setting ………………………………………………… 16-7

D Updating from the PC ……………………………………………… 16-8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1-1

PANEL DESCRIPTION Section 1

■ Front panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-2

■ Rear panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-12

■ LCD display …………………………………………………………… 1-14

■ Screen menu arrangement …………………………………………… 1-15

1-2

■ Front panel

q POWER SWITCH [POWER] (p. 3-2)

➥ Push to turn the transceiver power ON.

• The [POWER] indicator above this switch lights green

when powered ON.

➥ Push for 1 sec. to turn the transceiver power

OFF.

• The [POWER] indicator lights orange when the trans-

ceiver is OFF when the internal power supply is

switched ON.

w TRANSMIT SWITCH [TRANSMIT]

Selects transmitting or receiving.

• The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the

[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open.

e ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH [TUNER] (p. 10-5)

➥ Turns the internal antenna tuner ON and OFF

(bypass) when pushed momentarily.

• The [TUNER] indicator above this switch lights green

when the tuner is turned ON, goes off when tuner is

turned OFF (bypassed).

➥ Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed

for 1 sec.

• The [TUNER] indicator blinks red during manual tun-

ing.

• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning

circuit is bypassed automatically after 20 sec.

r TIMER SWITCH [TIMER] (p. 11-4)

➥ Turns the sleep or daily timer function ON and

OFF.

• The [TIMER] indicator above this switch lights green

when the timer is in use.

➥ Enters timer set mode when pushed for 1 sec.

t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]

Accepts standard stereo headphones.

• Output power: 50 mW with an 8 Ω load.

• When headphones are connected, the internal speaker

or connected external speaker does not function.

y ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY] (p. 2-4)

Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic

keyer for CW operation.

• You can select internal electronic keyer, bug-key or

straight key operation in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)

• A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See

[KEY] on p. 1-13.

• Keyer polarity (dot and dash) can be reversed in keyer

set mode. (p. 4-12)

• 4-channel memory keyer is available for your conve-

nience. (p. 4-8)

u MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]

Accepts an optional microphone.

• See p. 15-4 for appropriate microphones.

• See p. 2-9 for microphone connector information.

(dot)

(com)

(dash)

Turn the internal power supply ON in advance. The

internal power supply switch is located on the rear

panel. (p. 3-2)

PANEL DESCRIPTION

io !0 !1 !2 !3

!4 !5 !6

!7 !8

1-3

i RF POWER CONTROL [RF PWR] (p. 3-12)

Continuously varies the RF output power from min-

imum (5 W*) to maximum (200 W*).

*AM mode: 5 W to 50 W

o MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC]

Adjusts microphone input gain.

• The transmit audio tone in SSB, AM and FM modes can

be adjusted independently in set mode. (p. 12-4)

✔

How to set the microphone gain.

Set the [MIC] control so that the ALC meter sometimes

swings during normal voice transmission in SSB, AM or FM

mode.

!0 VOX/BREAK-IN SWITCH [VOX/BK-IN]

➥ Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF dur-

ing SSB, AM and FM mode operation. (p. 6-2)

➥ Push to turn the break-in function ON (semi-break-

in, full-break-in)

and OFF during CW mode opera-

tion. (p. 6-3)

➥ Push for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode. (p. 6-2)

✔

What is the VOX function?

The VOX function (voice operated transmission) starts trans-

mission without pushing the transmit switch or PTT switch

when you speak into the microphone; then, automatically re-

turns to receive when you stop speaking.

✔

What is the break-in function?

The break-in function switches transmit and receive with CW

keying. Full break-in (QSK) can monitor the receive signal

during keying.

!1 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL

[KEY SPEED] (p. 4-4)

Adjusts the internal electronic CW keyer’s speed.

• 6 wpm (min.) to 60 wpm (max.) can be set.

!2 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL [DELAY] (p. 6-3)

Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay time

for CW semi-break-in operations.

!3 MONITOR SWITCH [MONI] (p. 6-4)

Monitors your transmitted IF signal.

• The CW sidetone functions regardless of [MONI] switch

setting in CW mode.

• The [MONI] indicator above this switch lights green

while the function is activated.

!4 MEMORY CARD SLOT [CF CARD] (p. 2-3)

Insert the supplied CF (Compact Flash) memory

card for both reading/storing a wide variety of the

transceiver’s information and data.

• The indicator beside the slot lights or blinks when the

transceiver reads or writes to the memory card.

• Push the eject button to remove the memory card.

!5 MONITOR GAIN CONTROL [MONI GAIN] (p. 6-4)

Adjusts the transmit IF signal monitor level.

!6 COMPRESSION LEVEL CONTROL [COMP]

(p. 6-5)

Adjusts the speech compression level in SSB.

!7 DRIVE GAIN CONTROL [DRIVE] (p. 3-13)

Adjusts the transmitter level at the driver stage. Ac-

tivate in all modes

(except SSB with [COMP] OFF).

!8 VOX GAIN CONTROL [VOX GAIN] (p. 6-2)

Adjusts the transmit/receive switching threshold

level for VOX operation.

Low

sensitivity

High

sensitivity

Push

Decreases

Increases

Push

Compression

gain decreases

Compression

gain increases

Push

Monitor gain

decreases

Monitor gain

increases

Push

Long delay for

slow speed keying

Short delay for

high speed keying

Max.

60 wpm

Min.

6 wpm

Recommended level for

an Icom microphone

Decreases Increases

Increases

Decreases

PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-4

■ Front panel (continued)

!9 AGC CONTROL [AGC] (for MAIN band; p. 5-11)

@0 AGC CONTROL [AGC] (for SUB band; p. 5-11)

Adjusts the continuously-variable AGC circuit time

constant.

• To use [AGC] control, push the appropriate band’s

[AGC VR] ([AGC VR] indicator lights).

@1 AGC VOLUME SWITCH [AGC VR]

(for MAIN band; p. 5-11)

@2 AGC VOLUME SWITCH [AGC VR]

(for SUB band; p. 5-11)

➥ Push to toggle [AGC] control usage ON and OFF.

• Use [AGC] control to set the AGC time constant when

switched ON.

• The [AGC VR] indicator above this switch lights

green when the control is ON.

➥ Turns the AGC function OFF when pushed for

1 sec.

@3 AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; for SUB band)

@4 AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; for MAIN band)

Varies the audio output level of the speaker or

headphones.

@5 RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (outer control; for MAIN

band; p. 3-9)

@6 RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (outer control; for SUB

band; p. 3-9)

Adjusts the RF gain level.

While rotating the RF gain control, you may hear

noise. This comes from the DSP unit and does

not indicate a malfunction.

@7 SQUELCH CONTROL [SQL] (outer control; for

MAIN band; p. 3-9)

@8 SQUELCH CONTROL [SQL] (outer control; for

SUB band; p. 3-9)

Adjusts the squelch threshold level. The squelch re-

moves noise output from the speaker (closed con-

dition) when no signal is received.

• The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also

available for other modes.

• 11 to 12 o’clock position is recommended for any set-

ting of the [SQL] control.

Deep

S-meter

squelch

Noise squelch

Squelch

is open.

Squelch

threshold

Shallow

Sensitivity

increases

Sensitivity

decreases

Audio output

increases

Audio output

decreases

Slow

Fast

PANEL DESCRIPTION

#0 #1@9

#3 #4

@7 @8

1-5

@9 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES

Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD

display to the right of these switches.

• Functions vary depending on the operating condition.

➥ Selects the antenna connector from

ANT1, ANT2, ANT3 and ANT4 when

pushed. (p. 10-2)

➥ Displays antenna selection memory

when pushed for 1 sec.

• When the receive antenna is activated, the

antenna which is connected to [ANT4] is

used for receive only.

When a transverter is in use, this [ANT]

does not function and ‘TRV’ appears.

➥ Selects RF power (Po), SWR, ALC,

COMP, VD or ID metering during transmit.

(p. 3-10)

➥ Switches the multi-function digital meter

ON and OFF when pushed for 1 sec.

(p. 3-10)

➥ Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps or

bypasses them. (p. 5-9)

• “P. AMP1” activates 10 dB preamp.

•

“P. AMP2” activates 16 dB high-gain preamp.

✔

What is the preamp?

The preamp amplifies received signals in the front end cir-

cuit to improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P. AMP1” or

“P. AMP2” when receiving weak signals.

➥ Selects 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenuator

when pushed. (p. 5-9)

➥ Selects 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB,

or 21 dB attenuator when pushed for

1 sec. (p. 5-9)

✔

What is the attenuator?

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distorting

when very strong signals are near the desired frequency, or

when very strong electric fields, such as from a broadcast-

ing station, are near your location.

➥ Activates and selects fast, middle or slow

AGC time constant when pushed. (p. 5-

11)

• In FM mode, only “FAST” is available.

➥ Enters the AGC set mode when pushed

for 1 sec. (p. 5-11)

AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to

8.0 sec.

(depends on mode), or turned OFF. When

AGC is “OFF,” the S-meter does not function.

✔

What is the AGC?

The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio

output level, even when the received signal strength varies

dramatically. Select “FAST” for tuning and then select “MID”

or “SLOW” depending on the receiving condition.

➥ Turns the speech compressor ON and

OFF in SSB mode. (p. 6-5)

➥ Switches the narrow, middle or wide

compression when pushed for 1 sec.

✔

What is the speech compressor?

The speech compressor compresses the transmitter audio

input to increase the average audio output level, to increase

talk power. This function is effective for long-distance com-

munication or when propagation conditions are poor.

➥ Turns the

⁄4

-speed tuning function ON

and OFF in SSB data, CW, RTTY and

PSK modes. (p. 3-6)

•

⁄4 function sets dial rotation to

⁄4 of normal

speed for fine tuning.

➥ Switches between the tone encoder,

tone squelch function and no-tone oper-

ation when pushed in FM mode. (pgs. 4-

32, 4-33)

➥ Enters the tone set mode when pushed

for 1 sec. in FM mode. (pgs. 4-32, 4-33)

➥ Switches the voice squelch control func-

tion ON and OFF; useful for scanning.

(p. 9-3)

#0 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX] (for MAIN band)

#1 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX] (for SUB band)

Lights red while transmitting.

• SUB band’s [TX] indicator lights only when in split oper-

ation.

#2 ANTI VOX CONTROL [ANTI VOX] (p. 6-2)

Adjusts the VOX deactivate level to prevent un-

wanted VOX activation from the speaker audio.

#3 LCD CONTRAST CONTROL [CONTRAST]

Adjusts the LCD contrast.

#4 LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL [BRIGHT]

Adjusts the LCD brightness.

Dark

Bright

Push

Low

contrast

High

contrast

Push

Decreases

cut-off level

Increases

cut-off level

Push

PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-6

■ Front panel (continued)

#5 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (for MAIN

band; p. 5-18)

#6 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (for SUB band;

p. 5-18)

Push to switch the DSP noise reduction ON and

OFF.

• The [NR] indicator above this switch lights green when

the function is activated.

#7 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]

(inner control; for SUB band; p. 5-18)

#8 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]

(inner control; for MAIN band; p. 5-18)

Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the

noise reduction is in use. Set for maximum read-

ability.

• To use this control, push the appropriate band’s [NR].

#9 NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB] (outer control;

for MAIN band; p. 5-17)

$0 NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB] (outer control;

for SUB band; p. 5-17)

Adjust the noise blanker threshold level.

• To use this control, push appropriate band’s [NB] switch.

$1 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (for MAIN band;

p. 5-17)

$2 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (for SUB band;

p. 5-17)

➥ Switches the noise blanker ON and OFF when

pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type

noise such as that generated by automobile igni-

tion systems. This function cannot be used for

FM, or non-pulse-type noise.

• The [NB] indicator above this switch lights green

while the function is activated.

➥ Enters blank-width set mode when pushed for

1 sec.

$3 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX] (for MAIN band)

$4 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX] (for SUB band)

Lights green while receiving a signal and when the

squelch is open.

LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (for MAIN band; p. 5-18)

$6 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (for SUB band; p. 5-18)

Lights when the dial lock function is activated.

$7 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT]

Lights during split frequency operation.

$8 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 1-14)

Shows the operating frequency, function switch

menus, spectrum scope screen, memory channel

screen, set mode settings, etc.

Deep

Shallow

Increases

Decreases

PANEL DESCRIPTION

$1 $2

$5$3 $6 $9$4$7 $8

%0 %1 %3 %4 %6%2 %5

1-7

$9 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES [

]/[

] (p. 8-2)

Push to select the desired memory channel.

• Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and

memory modes.

%0 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1]–[F-7]

Push to select the function indicated in the LCD dis-

play above these switches.

• Functions vary depending on the operating condition.

%1 MODE SWITCHES

Selects the desired mode. (p. 3-8)

• Announces selected mode via the speech synthesizer.

(p. 12-16)

➥ Selects USB and LSB modes alternately.

➥ Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse)

modes alternately.

➥ Switches between RTTY and PSK

mode.

➥ Switches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY re-

verse)

mode when pushed for 1 sec. in

RTTY mode.

➥ Switches PSK and PSK-R (PSK reverse)

mode when pushed for 1 sec. in PSK

mode.

➥ Selects AM and FM modes alternately.

➥ Selects SSB, AM or FM data mode

(USB-

D, LSB-D, AM-D, FM-D)

when pushed in

SSB, AM or FM mode, respectively.

➥ Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed

for 1 sec.

%2 MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE SWITCH [M.SCOPE]

(p. 5-4)

Turns the mini spectrum scope screen ON and OFF.

• The mini spectrum scope screen can be displayed with

another screen, such as memory or set mode screen,

simultaneously.

%3 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC]

(p. 7-3)

➥ Records the received signal for the preset time

period when pushed.

• After the preset time has passed, stops recording au-

tomatically.

➥ Records the received signal until cancelling the

record when pushed for 1 sec.

• Push this switch momentarily to stops recording.

• The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audio.

%4 VOICE MEMORY PLAY BACK SWITCH [PLAY]

(p. 7-4)

➥ Plays back the previously recorded audio for the

preset time period when pushed.

➥ Plays back all of the previously recorded audio

when pushed for 1 sec.

%5 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET]

➥ Push to exit, or return to the previous screen in-

dication during spectrum scope, memory, scan or

set mode screen display.

➥ Displays set mode menu screen when pushed

for 1 sec.

%6 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH [XFC]

(p. 6-6)

Monitors the transmit frequency (including ∂TX fre-

quency offset)

when pushed and held during split fre-

quency operation.

• While pushing this switch, the transmit frequency can be

changed with the main dial, keypad, memo pad or

[Y]/[Z] switches.

• When the split lock function is turned ON, pushing [XFC]

cancels the dial lock function. (p. 6-7)

PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-8

■ Front panel (continued)

%7 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH [MP-W] (p. 8-7)

Programs the selected readout frequency and op-

erating mode into a memo pad.

• The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads.

• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10

in set mode. (p. 12-16)

%8 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [V/M]

➥ Switches the selected readout operating mode

between the VFO and memory when pushed.

(pgs. 3-3, 8-2)

➥ Transfers the memory contents to VFO when

pushed for 1 sec. (p. 5-5)

%9 KEYPAD

➥ Pushing a key selects the operating band.

• [GENE•.] selects the general coverage band.

➥ Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up other

stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 3-4)

• Icom’s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-

quencies in each band.

➥ After pushing [F-INP•ENT], enters a frequency or

memory channel. Pushing [F-INP•ENT] or [Y/[Z]

is necessary to end. (pgs. 3-5, 8-2)

• e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz, push [F-INP] [1.8•1] [10•4]

[GENE •] [1.8•1] [28•9] [14•5] [F-INP•

ENT].

^0 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 8-4)

Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-

ing mode into the displayed memory channel when

pushed for 1 sec.

• This function is available both in VFO and memory

modes.

^1 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH [MP-R] (p. 8-7)

Each push calls up a frequency and operating mode

in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently pro-

grammed frequencies and operating modes can be

recalled, starting from the most recent.

• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10

in set mode. (p. 12-16)

FILTER SWITCH [FILTER] (for MAIN band; p. 5-13)

^3 FILTER SWITCH [FILTER] (for SUB band; p. 5-13)

➥ Selects one of 3 IF filter settings.

➥ Enters the filter set screen when pushed for

1 sec.

^4 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER

SWITCH [APF/TPF] (for MAIN band)

^5 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER

SWITCH [APF/TPF] (for SUB band)

➥ Push to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF

during CW mode operation. (p. 4-6)

➥ Push to turn the twin peak filter ON and OFF dur-

ing RTTY mode operation. (p. 4-14)

• “ ” appears when audio peak filter is in use.

• “ ” appears when twin peak filter is in use.

➥ During CW mode operation, push for 1 sec. to

select the APF passband width from 80, 160 and

320 Hz. (p. 4-6)

TPF

APF

PANEL DESCRIPTION

%7 %8 ^0 ^1%9

&0 &8&1 &5&4&2 &6 &3 &7&9

^2 ^3

1-9

^6 NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (for SUB band; p. 5-19)

NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (for MAIN band; p. 5-19)

➥ Switches the notch function between auto, man-

ual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.

➥ Turns the manual notch function ON and OFF

when pushed in CW, RTTY and PSK31 mode.

➥ Turns the auto notch function ON and OFF when

pushed in FM mode.

• “ ” appears when auto notch is in use.

• “ ” appears when manual notch is in use.

➥ Switches the manual notch characteristics from

wide, middle and narrow when pushed for 1 sec.

✔

What is the notch function?

The notch function eliminates unwanted CW or AM carrier

tones while preserving the desired voice signal. The DSP cir-

cuit automatically adjusts the filtering frequency to effectively

eliminate unwanted tones.

^8 DUALWATCH SWITCH [DUALWATCH] (p. 5-16)

➥ Turns the dualwatch function ON and OFF when

pushed.

➥ Turns the dualwatch function ON and equalizes

the main/sub readout frequency to the sub/main

readout when pushed for 1 sec.

(Quick dualwatch

function)

• The quick dualwatch function can be turned OFF

using set mode. (p. 12-14)

^9 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 6-6)

➥ Turns the split function ON and OFF when

pushed.

➥ Turns the split function ON. When pushed for

1 sec. in non-FM modes, equalizes the sub read-

out frequency to the main readout and sets the

sub readout for frequency input. (Quick split func-

tion)

• The offset frequency is shifted from the main readout

frequency in FM mode. (p. 12-15)

• The quick split function can be turned OFF using set

mode. (p. 12-15)

➥ Turns the split function ON and shifts the sub

readout frequency after inputting an offset.

&0 MAIN BAND ACCESS SWITCH [MAIN]

Selects the main readout.

• The main readout frequency is clearly displayed. The

sub readout functions only during split operation or du-

alwatch.

&1 MAIN/SUB EQUALIZING SWITCH [M=S]

Equalizes the sub readout frequency to the main

readout frequency when pushed for 1 sec.

&2 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTO TUNE]

(for MAIN band)

&3 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTO TUNE]

(for SUB band)

Turns the automatic tuning function ON and OFF in

CW and AM modes.

&4 MAIN DIAL

Changes the displayed frequency (main band), se-

lects set mode setting, etc.

&5 MAIN/SUB CHANGE SWITCH [CHANGE]

Switches the frequency and selected memory

channel between main and sub readouts when

pushed.

• Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre-

quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. 6-6)

&6 LOCK SWITCH [LOCK] (for MAIN band; p. 5-18)

&7 LOCK SWITCH [LOCK] (for SUB band; p. 5-18)

Push to switch the dial lock function ON and OFF.

&8 SUB BAND ACCESS SWITCH [SUB]

Selects the sub readout.

• The sub readout frequency is clearly displayed. The

main readout functions only during split operation or du-

alwatch.

&9 SUB DIAL

Changes the displayed frequency in sub band.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-

nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-

tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-10

■ Front panel (continued)

*0 RIT/

∂∂

TX CONTROL [RIT/

∂∂

TX] (pgs. 5-10, 6-4)

Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency without

changing the transmit and/or receive frequency.

• Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency,

or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the

frequency. The RIT or ∂TX functions must be ON.

• The shift frequency range is ±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps

(or ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).

*1 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN PBT]

(for MAIN band; p. 5-12)

*2 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN PBT]

(for SUB band; p. 5-12)

Adjusts the receiver’s IF filter “passband width” via

the DSP.

• Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in the

multi-function display.

• Push [PBT CLEAR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settings.

• Variable range is set to half of the IF filter passband

width. 25 Hz steps and 50 Hz steps are available.

✔

What is the PBT control?

The PBT function electronically modifies the IF passband

width to reject interference. This transceiver uses the DSP

circuit for the PBT function.

*3 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT CLEAR]

(for MAIN band; p. 5-12)

*4 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT CLEAR]

(for SUB band; p. 5-12)

Clears the PBT settings when pushed for 1 sec.

• The [PBT CLEAR] indicator above this switch lights

when PBT is in use.

PBT1

PBT2

Low cutHigh cut Center

–+

Frequency

increases

Frequency

decreases

PANEL DESCRIPTION

(5 (6 (7 (8

*3*1 *2*4

1-11

*5 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL [DIGI-SEL]

(for MAIN band; p. 5-19)

*6 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL [DIGI-SEL]

(for SUB band; p. 5-19)

Adjusts the digital RF selector center frequency.

• The control can be reassigned as the audio peak filter

adjustment (p. 12-18)

*7 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR SWITCH [DIGI-SEL]

(for MAIN band; p. 5-19)

*8 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR SWITCH [DIGI-SEL]

(for SUB band; p. 5-19)

Turns the digital RF preselector ON and OFF.

• The [DIGI-SEL] indicator lights green when the prese-

lector is in use.

*9 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]

(for SUB band; outer control; p. 5-19)

(0 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]

(for MAIN band; outer control; p. 5-19)

Varies the “valley” frequency of the manual notch fil-

ter to reject an interfering signal while the manual

notch function is ON.

• Notch filter center frequency:

SSB : –1060 Hz to 4040 Hz

CW : CW pitch freq. + 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq.

–2540 Hz

AM : –5100 Hz to 5100 Hz

(1 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH] (p. 4-5)

Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW side

tone pitch without changing the operating frequency.

(2 RIT SWITCH [RIT] (p. 5-10)

➥ Turns the RIT function ON and OFF when

pushed.

• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the RIT frequency.

➥ Adds the RIT shift frequency to the operating fre-

quency when pushed for 1 sec.

✔

What is the RIT function?

Receiver incremental tuning (RIT) shifts the receive fre-

quency without shifting the transmit frequency.

This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you on off-fre-

quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-

sounding voice characteristics, etc.

∂∂

TX SWITCH [

∂∂

TX] (p. 6-4)

➥ Turns the ∂TX function ON and OFF when

pushed.

• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the ∂TX frequency.

➥ Adds the ∂TX shift frequency to the operating

frequency when pushed for 1 sec.

✔

What is the

∂∂

TX function?

∂TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the receive

frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency operation

in CW, etc.

(4 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pgs. 5-10, 6-4)

Clears the RIT/∂TX shift frequency when pushed

for 1 sec. or when pushed momentarily, depending

on the quick RIT/∂TX clear function setting

(p. 12-

17)

(5 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS] (for MAIN band)

(6 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS] (for SUB band)

➥ Turns the quick tuning step ON and OFF. (p. 3-

• While the quick tuning indicator, “Z,” is displayed

above the frequency indication, the frequency can be

changed in programmed kHz steps.

• 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are avail-

able for each operating mode independently.

➥ When the quick tuning step is OFF, push for

1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON and OFF.

(p. 3-7)

➥ When the quick tuning step is ON, push for

1 sec. to enter quick tuning step set mode. (p. 3-

(7 SPEECH SWITCH [SPEECH]

(for MAIN band; p. 13-3)

(8 SPEECH SWITCH [SPEECH]

(for SUB band; p. 13-3)

➥ Push to announce the S-meter indication and the

selected readout frequency.

➥ The selected operating mode is additionally an-

nounced when pushed for 1 sec.

High

frequency

Low

frequency

Higher

frequency

Lower

frequency

Higher

frequency

Lower

frequency

PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-12

■ Rear panel

q ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT 1] (p. 2-4)

w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT 2] (p. 2-4)

e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3 [ANT 3] (p. 2-4)

r ANTENNA CONNECTOR 4 [ANT 4] (p. 2-4)

Accept a 50 Ω antenna with a PL-259 plug connec-

tor.

t GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 2-3)

Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri-

cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.

y CIRCUIT BREAKER

Cuts off the AC input when over-current occurs.

u RECEIVE ANTENNA B OUT [RX ANT B– OUT]

i RECEIVE ANTENNA B IN [RX ANT B– IN]

Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-

cuit and receiver’s RF stage in SUB band (MAIN

band during split operation).

Connects an external unit, such as preamplifier or

RF filter, using BNC connectors, if desired.

When no external unit is connected, [RX ANT B–

OUT] and [RX ANT B– IN] must be shorted with the

supplied coaxial cable. (p. 2-2)

o TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]

(p. 2-5)

External transverter input/output connector.

Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or

when the transverter function is in use. (pgs. 2-10,

4-6)

!0 RECEIVE ANTENNA A OUT [RX ANT A– OUT]

!1 RECEIVE ANTENNA A IN [RX ANT A– IN]

Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-

cuit and receiver’s RF stage in MAIN band (SUB

band during split operation).

Connects an external unit, such as preamplifier or

RF filter, using BNC connectors, if desired.

When no external unit is connected, [RX ANT A–

OUT] and [RX ANT A– IN] must be shorted with the

supplied coaxial cable. (p. 2-2)

!2 MAIN POWER SWITCH [I/O] (p. 3-2)

Turns the internal power supply ON and OFF.

!3 AC POWER SOCKET [AC] (p. 2-4)

Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC

line-voltage receptacle.

EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK MAIN [EXT-SP MAIN]

(p. 2-5)

!5 EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK SUB [EXT-SP SUB]

(p. 2-5)

Connects an external speaker (4–8 Ω), if desired.

Receiver

Transmitter

[RX ANT A/B]

OUT

Transmit/Receive

switching circuit

PANEL DESCRIPTION

MAINSUB

ACC 1

ACC 2

ACC 1

ACC 2

ALC

ADJ

ALC

RELAY

KEY

EXT

KEYPAD

METER

DC OUT

15V

MAX1A

REF I/O

10MHz

10dBm

INOUT

REMOTE

232C

KEY BOARD

EXT

DISPLAY

S/P DIF

EXT

ANT 1

ANT 2

ANT 3

ANT 4

GND

VERTER

RX ANT

OUT

q w e r u i o !0 !1

!4!5!7!9 !6!8@0@1@2@3@4@5@6@7@8@9#0#1#2#3 #4

t y

1-13

!6 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 A [ACC 1–A]

!7 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 A [ACC 2–A]

!8 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 B [ACC 1–B]

!9 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 B [ACC 2–B]

Enable connection of external equipment such as a

linear amplifier, an automatic antenna

selector/tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc.

• See p. 2-10 for socket information.

@0 ALC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT POT [ALC ADJ]

Adjusts the ALC levels.

No adjustment is required when the ALC output

level of the connected non-Icom linear amplifier is

0 to –4 V DC.

@1 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 2-7)

Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-

ear amplifier.

@2 T/R CONTROL JACK [RELAY] (p. 2-7)

Goes to ground when transmitting to control an ex-

ternal unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplifier.

@3 STRAIGHT KEY JACK [KEY] (p. 2-4)

Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer

with

⁄4 inch standard plug.

• [ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a

straight key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the

internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)

@4 EXTERNAL KEYPAD JACK [EXT KEYPAD]

(p. 2-6)

Connects an external keypad for direct voice mem-

ory or electronic keyer control.

Transceiver mute control line (both transmit and re-

ceive) is also supported.

@5 METER JACK [METER] (p. 2-6)

Outputs the receiving signal strength level signal,

transmit output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com-

pression, VD or ID level for external meter indication.

@6 DC OUTPUT JACK [DC OUT] (p. 2-6)

Outputs a regulated 14 V DC (approx.) for external

equipment. Connected in parallel with 13.8 V out-

puts of [ACC 1] and [ACC 2]. (max. 1 A in total)

@7 REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT

TERMINAL [REF I/O]

Inputs/outputs a 10 MHz reference signal.

@8 S/P DIF INPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– IN] (p. 2-6)

@9 S/P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– OUT]

(p. 2-6)

Connects external equipment that supports S/P DIF

input/output.

#0 CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]

(p. 2-5)

➥ Connects a PC via the optional CT-17

CI-V LEVEL

CONVERTER for external control of the transceiver.

➥ Used for transceive operation with another Icom

CI-V transceiver or receiver.

#1 RS-232C TERMINAL [RS-232C] (p. 2-5)

Connects an RS-232C cable, D-sub 9-pin to con-

nect the IC-7800 to a PC.

Can be used for remotely control the IC-7800 with-

out the optional CT-17, or for RTTY/PSK31 de-

coded signal output. The [RS-232C] interface is

wired as a modem (DCE).

#2 KEYBOARD CONNECTOR [KEYBOARD]

(p. 2-6)

Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK31 op-

erations.

• USB (Universal Serial Bus) keyboard is supported.

#3 EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL

[EXT-DISPLAY] (p. 2-6)

Connects to an external display monitor.

• At least 800×600 pixel display is necessary.

#4 ETHERNET CONNECTOR (p. 16-6)

Connects to a PC through a LAN (Local Area Net-

work).

(+)

(_)

NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be

lower than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC,

200 mA with MOS-FET switching).

PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ LCD display

q BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-12)

Shows the passband width of the IF filter.

w MODE INDICATOR

Shows the selected mode.

e SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 5-12)

Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter.

r QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 3-6)

Appears when the quick tuning step function is in use.

t PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-12)

Graphically displays the passband width for twin

PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-

eration.

y BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR

Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is

selected during CW, RTTY or PSK31 operation.

u RTTY TUNING INDICATOR

Shows the tuning level in RTTY mode.

i CLOCK READOUT

Shows the current time.

o S/RF METER (p. 3-10)

Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows

the relative output power, SWR, ALC or compres-

sion levels while transmitting.

!0 TX INDICATOR

Indicates the frequency readout for transmit.

!1 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 3-3)

Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-

nel number.

!2 IF FILTER INDICATOR

Shows the selected IF filter number.

!3 FREQUENCY READOUTS

Shows the operating frequency.

• Gray characters are used for non-active readout.

SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 9-7)

Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as a

select memory channel.

!5 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS

➥ Shows the selected memory channel contents in

VFO mode.

➥ Shows the VFO contents in memory mode.

!6 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE

Indicates the function of the multi-function switches.

!7 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE

Indicates the function of the LCD function switches

([F-1] – [F-7]).

!8 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN

Shows the screens for the multi-function digital

meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory

channel, scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK

decoder, IF filter selection or set modes, etc.

1-14

PANEL DESCRIPTION

q w e t uy ir q w e t uyr

!4 !5

1-15

■ Screen menu arrangement

The following screens can be selected from the start

up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-

lowing chart.

Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the start

up screen. See p. 12-3 for set mode arrangement.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

• Spectrum scope screen (p. 5-2)

• Voice recorder screen (p. 7-3)

• RTTY decoder screen (p. 4-13)

• Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 4-8)

• Memory channel screen (p. 8-3)

• PSK31 decoder screen (p. 4-21)

• Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 9-4)

• Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 9-6)

• Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2)

2-1

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 2

■ Unpacking ……………………………………………………………… 2-2

■ Antenna jumper cable connection …………………………………… 2-2

■ Selecting a location …………………………………………………… 2-2

■ Rack mounting handle attachment …………………………………… 2-2

■ Grounding ……………………………………………………………… 2-3

■ Antenna connection …………………………………………………… 2-3

■ CF (Compact Flash) memory card …………………………………… 2-3

■ Required connections ………………………………………………… 2-4

D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-4

D Rear panel …………………………………………………………… 2-4

■ Advanced connections ………………………………………………… 2-5

D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-5

D Rear panel—1 ……………………………………………………… 2-5

D Rear panel—2 ……………………………………………………… 2-6

■ Linear amplifier connections …………………………………………… 2-7

D Connecting the IC-PW1 …………………………………………… 2-7

D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier …………………………… 2-7

■ Transverter jack information …………………………………………… 2-8

■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ………………………………… 2-8

■ Microphone connector information …………………………………… 2-9

■ Microphones (options) ………………………………………………… 2-9

D SM-20 ………………………………………………………………… 2-9

D HM-36 ………………………………………………………………… 2-9

■ Accessory connector information …………………………………… 2-10

CAUTION!: The transceiver weighs approx. 25 kg (55 lb).

Always have two people available to carry, lift or

turn over the transceiver.

2-2

■ Unpacking

After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the

delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons.

For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-

ment included with the IC-7800, see ‘Supplied acces-

sories’ on p. iii of this manual.

■ Antenna jumper cable connection

Connect the supplied coaxial cable (terminated with

BNC connectors) between [RX ANT A— IN] and [RX

ANT A— OUT], and, [RX ANT B— IN] and [RX ANT

B— OUT], respectively.

When connecting an external filter unit, pre-amplifier,

etc., connect the unit between [RX ANT A/B— IN] and

[RX ANT A/B— OUT] connectors.

■ Selecting a location

Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-

quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or

vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-

ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.

The base of the transceiver has an adjustable stand

for desktop use. Set the stand to one of two angles de-

pending on your operating preference.

■ Rack mounting handle attachment

Remove the four screws from both sides of the front

panel and the two screws from both sides of the side

panel, then attach the rack mounting handles to the

sides of the transceiver using the supplied screws.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

2-3

■ Grounding

To prevent electrical shock, television interference

(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-

lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND

terminal on the rear panel.

For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap

to a long earth-sunk copper rod. Make the distance be-

tween the [GND] terminal and ground as short as pos-

sible.

R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND]

terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-

tion could cause an explosion or electric shock.

■ Antenna connection

For radio communications, the antenna is of critical im-

portance, along with output power and receiver sensi-

tivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched 50 Ω

antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or better

of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) for your de-

sired band. Of course, the transmission line should be

a coaxial cable.

When using 1 antenna, use the [ANT1] connector.

CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from lightning

by using a lightning arrestor.

■ CF (Compact Flash) memory card

Insert the supplied CF (Compact Flash) memory

card into the CF memory card slot.

• To remove the CF memory card, push-in the button, lo-

cated at left hand side of the slot.

Make sure to install the memory card correctly.

NEVER insert or remove the CF memory card

when the read/write indicator lights or blinks.

Read/write indicator

Antenna SWR

Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency

range and SWR may be increased out-of-range.

When the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the

transceiver’s power drops to protect the final transis-

tors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful to match

the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows full

power for transmitting. The IC-7800 has an SWR

meter to monitor the antenna SWR continuously.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

30 mm ≈

⁄

8 in 10 mm ≈

⁄

8 in 1–2 mm ≈

⁄

16 in

30 mm

10 mm (soft solder)

10 mm

1–2 mm

solder solder

Soft

solder

Coupling ring

Slide the coupling ring

down. Strip the cable

jacket and soft solder.

Slide the connector

body on and solder it.

Screw the coupling

ring onto the

connector body.

Strip the cable as

shown at left. Soft sol-

der the center con-

ductor.

2-4

■ Required connections

Front panel

Rear panel

MAINSUB

ACC 1

ACC 2

ACC 1

ACC 2

ALC

ADJ

ALC

RELAY

KEY

EXT

KEYPAD

METER

DC OUT

15V

MAX1A

REF I/O

10MHz

10dBm

INOUT

REMOTE

232C

KEY BOARD

EXT

DISPLAY

S/P DIF

EXT

ANT 1

ANT 2

ANT 3

ANT 4

GND

VERTER

RX ANT

OUT

Straight key

A jumper cable is

connected.

Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-3)

Ground

(p. 2-3)

Use the heaviest gauge

wire or strap available and

make the connection as

short as possible.

Grounding prevents elec-

trical shocks, TVI and oth-

er problems.

AC outlet

R WARNING:

Use the supplied

AC power cable

only.

NOTE: Attach the sup-

plied antenna connec-

tor cap when no anten-

na or external equip-

ment is connected.

[Example]: ANT1 for 1.8–18 MHz bands, ANT 2 for 21–28 bands

ANT3 for 50 MHz band, ANT 4 for receive antenna.

Microphones (p. 2-9)

CW key

A straight or bug key can be used when the

internal electronic keyer is turned OFF in

keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)

Optional

SM-20

Optional

HM-36

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

2-5

■ Advanced connections

Front panel

Rear panel— 1

MAINSUB

ACC 1

ACC 2

ACC 1

ACC 2

ALC

ADJ

ALC

RELAY

KEY

EXT

KEYPAD

METER

DC OUT

15V

MAX1A

REF I/O

10MHz

10dBm

INOUT

REMOTE

232C

KEY BOARD

EXT

DISPLAY

S/P DIF

EXT

ANT 1

ANT 2

ANT 3

ANT 4

GND

VERTER

RX ANT

OUT

RX ANT A/B IN/OUT

Connects an external preamp

or lowpass filter.

External speaker (p. 15-4)

ACC sockets

(pgs.2-8, 2-10)

Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-7)

Connects a linear amplifier,

antenna selector, etc.

[X-VERTER]

Connects a transverter

for V/UHF band use.

[RELAY], [ALC] (p.2-7)

Used for connecting a

non-Icom linear amplifier.

SP-20

(option)

[REMOTE], [RS-232C] (p. 14-2)

Used for computer control and transceive

operation.

The optional CT-17 is required when con-

necting a PC to [REMOTE].

MIC

Headphones

CF (Compact Flash) memory card

The AFSK modulation signal can also

be input to [MIC].

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

2-6

Rear panel— 2

MAINSUB

ACC 1

ACC 2

ACC 1

ACC 2

ALC

ADJ

ALC

RELAY

KEY

EXT

KEYPAD

METER

DC OUT

15V

MAX1A

REF I/O

10MHz

10dBm

INOUT

REMOTE

232C

KEY BOARD

EXT-DISPLAY

S/ P DID

EXT-SP

ANT 1

ANT 2

ANT 3

ANT 4

GND

X-VERTER

RX ANT

OUT

External Display

Connects a PC-style

monitor display (at least

800×600 resolution).

Video output signal can

be turned ON and OFF

in set mode (p. 12-12)

[DC OUT]

Outputs regulated 14 V

(approx.) DC for external

equipment power supply.

(max. 1 A capacity)

External keypad

Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory

and memory keyer controls.

Keyboard

Connects an USB type

PC keyboard directly for

RTTY/PSK31 operation,

as well as other text edit

operations.

Connects a PC for

audio signal data

input/output.

48 kHz, 16-bit

Stereo output

(L=Main band;

R=Sub band)

[S/P DEAF IN/OUT]

Connects a PC

via a LAN for the

CPU firmware

update.

Ethernet connector (p. 16-6)

1.5 kΩ

±5%

1.5 kΩ

±5%

2.2 kΩ

±5%

4.7 kΩ

±5%

(T1/M1)

(T2/M2)

(T3/M3)

(T4/M4)

EXTERNAL KEYPAD

3.5 (d) mm;

1⁄8≤

plug

Mute switch: Mutes both transmission and

reception when switched ON during trans-

ceive operation, etc.

[METER]

Connects an external meter, etc.

3.5 (d) mm;

1⁄8≤

plug

MAIN band meter

SUB band meter

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

2-7

■ Linear amplifier connections

Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO

Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier

R WARNING:

Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli-

fier ALC output level referring to the linear amplifier

instruction manual.

The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to

–4 V, and the transceiver does not accept positive

voltage. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings

could cause a fire or ruin the linear amplifier.

The maximum control level of [RELAY] jack is

16 V/0.5 A DC with initial setting, and 250 V/200 mA

with “MOS-FET” setting (see p. 12-9 for details).

Use an external relay unit when your non-Icom lin-

ear amplifier requires control voltage and/or current

greater than specified.

RF OUTPUT RF INPUT

SEND

ALC

50 Ω

coaxial cable

Transceiver

ANT1

ALC

RELAY

To an

antenna

Non-Icom linear amplifier

To an

antenna

ACC-1

ANT

ANT2

ANT1

ACC 2

INPUT1

INPUT2

REMOTE

EXCITER

1&2

GND

IC-PW1/EURO

AC outlet

(Non-European versions: 100–120/220–240 V

European version : 230 V)

Ground

Transceiver

REMOTE

Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

Be sure to connect the cable

to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack.

Coaxial cable

(supplied with the

IC-PW1/EURO)

Coaxial cable*

*Optional

Connect

[INPUT2]

if necessary

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

2-8

■ Transverter jack information

When 2 to 13.8 V is applied to pin 6 of [ACC 2], the [X-

VERTER] connector is activated for transverter opera-

tion and the antenna connectors do not receive or

transmit any signals. (p. 4-6)

While receiving, [X-VERTER] connector can be acti-

vated as an input terminal from an external transverter.

While transmitting, the [X-VERTER] connector outputs

signals of the displayed frequency at –20 dBm (22 mV)

as signals for the external transverter.

■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections

To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the

diagram below.

Connect to serial port, parallel

port, speaker jack, microphone

jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.

See the instruction manual of

the application for details.

D AFSK operation

• When connecting to [ACC 1]

• When connecting to [MIC]

• When using a PC application

• When using a TNC

RS-232C

TNC or scan converter

PTT

Audio output

AF input

GND

AFSK output

AF input

GND

PTT*

SQL input

†

*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction

manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.).

†

When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.).

†

Rear panel view

RS-232C

TNC or scan converter

Connect to serial port, parallel

port, speaker jack, microphone

jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.

See the instruction manual of the

application for details.

D FSK operation— when connecting to [ACC 1]

• When using a PC application

• When using a TNC

Rear panel view

RTTY

GND

SEND

RTTY

GND

SEND

RTTY OUTPUT

GND

AUDIO INPUT

PTT

RTTY OUTPUT

GND

AUDIO INPUT

PTT

Transverter connector

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

2-9

■ Microphone connector information

(Front panel view)

CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this

can damage the internal 8 V regulator.

NOTE: DC voltage is applied to pin 1 for micro-

phone operation. Take care when using a non-Icom

microphone.

■ Microphones (options)

q UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]

Change the selected readout frequency or memory

channel.

• Continuous pushing changes the frequency or memory

channel number continuously.

• While pushing [XFC], the transmit readout frequency can

be controlled while in split frequency operation.

• The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset

in the keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)

w PTT SWITCH

Push and hold to transmit; release to receive.

e PTT LOCK SWITCH (available for SM-20 only)

Push to toggle between transmit and receive.

D SM-20

D HM-36

y GND (PTT ground)

t PTT

r Main readout squelch switch

q Microphone input

w +8 V DC output

e Frequency up/down

u GND

(Microphone ground)

i Main readout AF output

(varies with [AF])

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

[MIC]

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Pin No.

w +8 V DC output Max. 10 mA

Frequency up Ground

Frequency down Ground through 470 Ω

Squelch open “Low” level

Squelch closed “High” level

2-10

■ Accessory connector information

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

ACC 2

PIN No.

NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

ACC 1

PIN No.

NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: If the CW side tone level limit or beep level

limit is in use, the CW side tone or beep tone de-

creases from the fixed level when the [AF] control is

rotated above a specified leve. (p. 12-5)

“High” level : More than 2.4 V

1 RTTY Controls RTTY keying “Low” level : Less than 0.6 V

Output current : Less than 2 mA

2 GND Connects to ground. Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2.

Input/output pin.

Ground level : –0.5 V to 0.8 V

3 SEND Goes to ground when transmitting.

Output current : Less than 20 mA

When grounded, transmits.

Input current (Tx) : Less than 200 mA

Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 3.

4 MOD

Modulator input. Input impedance : 10 kΩ

Connects to a modulator. Input level : Approx. 100 mV rms

AF detector output.

Output impedance : 4.7 kΩ

5 AF Fixed, regardless of [AF] position

Output level : 100–300 mV rms

in default settings. (see notes below)

6 SQLS

Squelch output. SQL open : Less than 0.3 V/5 mA

Goes to ground when squelch opens.

SQL closed : More than 6.0 V/100 µA

7 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON.

Output current : Max. 1 A

Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.

Control voltage : –4 V to 0 V

8 ALC ALC voltage input. Input impedance : More than 10 kΩ

Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5.

1 8 V Regulated 8 V output.

Output voltage : 8 V ±0.3 V

Output current : Less than 10 mA

2 GND Same as ACC 1 pin 2.

3 SEND Same as ACC 1 pin 3.

4 BAND

Band voltage output.

Output voltage : 0 to 8.0 V

(Varies with amateur band)

5 ALC Same as ACC 1 pin 8.

6TRV

Activates [X-VERTER] input/output Input impedance : More than 10 kΩ

when “HIGH” voltage is applied. Input voltage : 2 to 13.8 V

13.8 V

Same as ACC 1 pin 7.

3-1

BASIC OPERATIONS Section 3

■ When first applying power (CPU resetting) ………………………… 3-2

■ Initial settings …………………………………………………………… 3-2

■ Main/Sub band selection ……………………………………………… 3-3

■ Selecting VFO/memory mode ………………………………………… 3-3

■ Selecting an operating band …………………………………………… 3-4

D Using the band stacking registers ………………………………… 3-4

■ Frequency setting ……………………………………………………… 3-5

D Tuning with the main dial …………………………………………… 3-5

D Direct frequency entry with the keypad …………………………… 3-5

D Quick tuning step …………………………………………………… 3-6

D Selecting “kHz” step ………………………………………………… 3-6

⁄4 tuning step function ……………………………………………… 3-6

D Selecting 1 Hz step ………………………………………………… 3-7

D Auto tuning step function …………………………………………… 3-7

D Band edge warning beep …………………………………………… 3-7

■ Operating mode selection ……………………………………………… 3-8

■ Volume setting ………………………………………………………… 3-9

■ RF gain adjustment …………………………………………………… 3-9

■ Squelch level adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-9

■ Meter indication selection …………………………………………… 3-10

D Multi-function digital meter ………………………………………… 3-10

D Meter type selection ……………………………………………… 3-11

■ Basic transmit operation ……………………………………………… 3-12

D Transmitting ………………………………………………………… 3-12

D Microphone gain adjustment ……………………………………… 3-12

D Drive gain adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-13

3-2

■ When first applying power (CPU resetting)

Before first applying power, make sure all connections

required for your system are complete by referring to

Section 2. Then, reset the transceiver using the follow-

ing procedure.

Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in

memory channels and returns programmed values

in set mode to default values.

q Turn the main power ON with [I/O] on the rear

panel.

• The transceiver power is still OFF and the [POWER] in-

dicator lights orange.

w While pushing and holding [F-INP•

ENT] and [MW],

push [POWER] to turn power ON.

• The CPU is reset.

• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.

• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies

when resetting is complete.

e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if de-

sired.

In cooler temperatures, the LCD may appear dark

and unstable after turning power ON. This is normal

and does not indicate any equipment malfunction.

■ Initial settings

After resetting the transceiver, set controls as shown

in the figure below.

[RF PWR]

: Max. clockwise

[MIC]

: 10–12 o’clock

[SQL]

: Max. counter-

clockwise

[AGC]: 12 o’clock

[DEGI-SEL]

: 12 o’clock

[NOTCH]

: 12 o’clock

[NB]

: Max. counter clockwise

[AF]

: Max. counter-

clockwise

[MONI GAIN], [COMP], [DRIVE],

[VOX GAIN], [ANTI VOX]

: 12 o’clock

[RF]

: Max. clockwise

[DELAY]

: Max. clockwise

[KEY SPEED]

: 10–12 o’clock

[CW PITCH]

: 12 o’clock

[NR]

: Max. counter clockwise

[F-INP•ENT][MW]

[I/O]

[POWER]

BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Main/Sub band selection

The IC-7800 has 2 identical receivers, main and sub.

The main band is displayed on the left hand side, and

the sub band is displayed on the right hand side of the

LCD. Some functions can only be applied to the se-

lected band and transmission occurs on the main band

(except during split frequency operation).

➥ Push [MAIN] to select the main band.

• The key backlight for [MAIN] lights.

• Main band’s frequency readout highlighted.

➥ Push [SUB] to select the sub band.

• The key backlight for [SUB] lights.

• Sub band’s frequency readout highlighted.

■ Selecting VFO/memory mode

VFO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscilla-

tor, and is commonly referred to as a main tuning func-

tion.

The main dial is often called the “VFO knob.”

➥ Push [V/M] to switch between VFO and memory

modes.

• “VFO” appears when in VFO mode, or the selected

memory channel number appears when in memory

mode.

• Pushing [V/M] for 1 sec. transfers the contents of the se-

lected memory channel to VFO. (p. 8-5)

“VFO” indicator

Memory channel

number

[V/M]

[MAIN] [SUB]

3-3

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-4

■ Selecting an operating band

The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories

for each band key, storing frequency and mode infor-

mation.

If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and oper-

ating mode last used are called up. When the key is

pushed again, another stored frequency and operating

mode are called up.

This function is convenient when you operate 3 modes

on one band. For example, one register is used for a

CW frequency, another for an SSB frequency and the

other one for an RTTY frequency.

See the table below for a list of the bands available

and the default settings for each band.

Using the band stacking registers

q Push [14•5], then select a frequency and an oper-

ating mode.

• Frequency and operating mode are memorized in the

first band stacking register.

w Push [14•5] again, then select another frequency

and operating mode.

• This frequency and operating mode are memorized in

the second band stacking register.

e Push [14•5] again, then select another frequency

and operating mode.

• This frequency and operating mode are memorized in

the third band stacking register.

• When a fourth frequency and operating mode are se-

lected on a band, the first register set in step q, is over

written.

[Example]: 14 MHz band

Band keys

BASIC OPERATIONS

BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3

1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW

3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB

7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW

10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW

14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW

18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB

21 MHz 21.200000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW

24 MHz 24.950000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 24.900000 MHz CW

28 MHz 28.500000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 28.100000 MHz CW

50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM

General 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB

3-5

■ Frequency setting

The transceiver has several tuning methods for conve-

nient frequency tuning.

Tuning with the main dial

q Push the desired band key on the keypad 1–3

times.

• 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band

with the band key.

• Push [MAIN] or [SUB] to select the band.

w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency in

the main band, rotate the sub dial to set the desired

frequency in the sub band.

If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indicator

lights, and the main dial does not function. In this

case, push [LOCK] to deactivate the lock function.

(see p. 5-18 for details)

✔

CONVENIENT!

The sub dial is always available for tuning the sub

band. The sub dial allows quick tuning in the sub band

without switching from main to sub.

Direct frequency entry with the keypad

The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency

entry as described below.

q Push [MAIN] or [SUB] to select the band.

w Push [F-INP•

ENT].

• “ ” indicator appears and keypad backlight

lights.

e Input the desired frequency

• Push [GENE•.] to input “. (decimal point)” between the

MHz units and kHz units.

r Push [F-INP•

ENT

] to set the input frequency.

• To cancel the input, push [Y]/[Z] instead of [F-INP•ENT].

[EXAMPLE]

7.00000 MHz

21.24000 MHz

21.24000 MHz ⇒ 21.36000 MHz

Push

Keypad

Band keys

Main dial Sub dial

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-6

Quick tuning step

The operating frequency can be changed in kHz steps

(0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable) for

quick tuning.

q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON.

•“Z” appears when the quick tuning function ON.

w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in pro-

grammed kHz steps.

e Push [TS] again to turn OFF the indicator.

r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired.

Selecting “kHz” step

q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON and

OFF.

•“Z” appears when the quick tuning function ON.

w Push [TS] for 1 sec. to enter tuning step setting dis-

play.

• Selected tuning steps for all modes appear.

e Select the desired operating mode.

Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning step.

t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps

for other modes, if desired.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the setting display.

NOTE: When entering quick tuning step set mode,

the quick tuning function must be activated first. The

main and sub bands have independent tuning step

settings.

⁄4 tuning step function

When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the

⁄4 tuning function is available. Dial rotation is reduced

⁄4 of normal speed when the

⁄4 tuning function is

ON for finer tuning control.

➥ Push [1/4] to toggle the

⁄4 tuning function ON and

OFF.

• “ ” appears when the

⁄4 tuning function is ON.

⁄4

⁄4 tuning step OFF

⁄4 tuning step ON

Main dial [TS]Select mode [TS]

BASIC OPERATIONS

Quick tuning indicator Quick tuning indicator

3-7

Selecting 1 Hz step

The minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine

tuning.

q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF.

w Push [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON

and OFF.

NOTE: 1 Hz tuning step activates for both main and

sub bands simultaneously. Therefore, either [TS]

can be used for the 1 Hz tuning step selection.

Auto tuning step function

When rotating main or sub dial rapidly, the tuning

speed accelerated automatically as selected.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects

set mode menu screen.

e Push [F-5•OTHERS] to enter miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “MAIN DIAL Auto

TS” or “SUB DIAL Auto TS.”

• “MAIN DIAL Auto TS” for main dial, “SUB DIAL Auto TS”

for sub dial selection.

t Rotate main dial to select the desired condition from

high, low and OFF.

• High : Approx. 5 times faster

• Low : Approx. twice faster

• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.

Band edge warning beep

When you tune outside of an amateur band’s frequency

range, a warning beep sounds.

This function can be turned OFF in set mode, if de-

sired.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects

set mode menu screen.

e Push [F5•OTHERS] to enter miscellaneous (others)

set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Beep (Band

Edge).”

t Rotate main dial to turn the band edge warning

beep ON and OFF.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.

[F-1•Y][F-2•Z]

[F5•OTHERS]

[EXIT/SET] [F-7•SET]

1Hz step indicator 1Hz step indicator

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-8

■ Operating mode selection

SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data), CW,

CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse (RTTY-R),

PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data, FM and FM

data modes are available in the IC-7800. Select the

desired operation mode as follows.

To select a mode of operation, push the desired mode

switch momentarily. Push the switch again to toggle

between USB and LSB, CW and CW-R, RTTY/RTTY-

R and PSK/PSK-R, AM and FM, if desired. Push the

switch for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-

R, PSK and PSK-R, if desired.

See the diagram below left for the order of selection.

Microphone signals are muted when data mode is

selected.

• Selecting SSB mode

➥ Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB.

• USB is selected first when above 10 MHz; or LSB is se-

lected first when below 10 MHz operation.

(USB is selected when 5 MHz band is selected for the

USA version.)

• After USB or LSB is selected, push [SSB] to toggle be-

tween USB and LSB.

• Selecting CW mode

➥ Push [CW] to select CW.

• After CW is selected, push [CW] to toggle between CW

and CW reverse mode.

• Selecting RTTY/PSK mode

➥ Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY or PSK.

• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] to tog-

gle between RTTY and PSK.

• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] for

1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY reverse, or,

PSK and PSK reverse mode, respectively.

• Selecting AM/FM mode

➥ Push [AM/FM] to select AM or FM.

• After AM or FM is selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle be-

tween AM and FM.

• Selecting DATA mode

➥ After USB, LSB, AM or FM is selected, push [DATA]

to select USB data, LSB data, AM data or FM data

mode, respectively.

• After data mode is selected, push [DATA] to toggle be-

tween regular voice and data mode.

• After data mode is selected, push [DATA] for 1 sec. to

select data 1, 2 and 3 in sequence.

USB

Push mode switch

for 1 sec.

Push mode switch

momentarily.

LSB

CW-R

RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R

USB

LSB

USB-D1

LSB-D1

AM-D1

FM-D1

USB-D2

LSB-D2

AM-D2

FM-D2

USB-D3

LSB-D3

AM-D3

FM-D3

[SSB] [CW] [RTTY/PSK] [AM/FM] [DATA]

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-9

■ Volume setting

➥ Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-

clockwise to decrease the audio output level.

• Set a suitable audio level.

■ RF gain adjustment

➥ Rotate [RF] control clockwise to increase, counter-

clockwise to decrease the receiver sensitivity.

■ Squelch level adjustment

The squelch removes noise output from the speaker

(closed position) when no signal is received.

➥ When no signal is received, rotate [SQL] control

fully counterclockwise first, then rotate [SQL] clock-

wise to the point that the noise just disappears.

[SQL] for main [SQL] for sub

S-meter squelch

Noise squelch (Recommended level; FM mode only)

Squelch is

open

[RF] for main [RF] for sub

Sensitivity

increases

Sensitivity

decreases

[AF] for main [AF] for sub

Audio output

increases

Audio output

decreases

BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Meter indication selection

The S/RF meter indication, during transmit, can be se-

lected from the following items as you desire.

➥ Push [METER] several times to select the desired

item.

Indicates the RF output power in watts.

Indicates the VSWR on the transmission

line.

Indicates the ALC level. The ALC circuit

begins to activate when the RF output

power reaches a preset level.

Indicates the compression level when

the speech compressor is in use.

Indicates the drain current of the final

amplifier MOS-FETs.

Indicates the drain terminal voltage of

the final amplifier MOS-FETs.

Multi-function digital meter

The IC-7800 can display the multi-function digital

meter in the LCD display. This meter displays all trans-

mit parameters simultaneously.

q Push [METER] for 1 sec. to turn the multi-function

digital meter ON.

w Push [F-1•P-HOLD] to toggle the peak level hold

function ON.

• “P-HOLD” appears on the window title when the peak

level hold function is ON.

e Push [METER] for 1 sec., or push [EXIT/SET] to

turn the multi-function digital meter OFF.

“P-HOLD” indicator

ALC

52V

1.5

∞

100

150

200

250

SWR

COMP

60dB

Signal strength

level readout

D readout

Power level readout

VSWR readout

Compression level

readout

ALC level readout V

D readout

[METER]

3-10

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-11

Meter type selection

A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7800—

Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters.

Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-

tion.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal

screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET], then push [F-3•DISPLAY] to select

display set mode.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Meter type (Nor-

mal Screen)” item.

r Rotate main dial to select the desired meter type

from “Standard,” “Edgewise” and “Bar.”

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode.

• Edgewise meter

• Bar meter

[F-1•Y] [EXIT/SET][F-7•SET][F-2•Z]

[F-3•DISPLAY]

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-12

■ Basic transmit operation

Transmitting

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause inter-

ference to other stations on the same frequency.

q Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-

mit.

• The main band’s [TX] indicator lights red.

• When split operation is activated, the sub band’s [TX] in-

dicator lights.

w Push [TRANSMIT] again or release [PTT] (micro-

phone) to return to receive.

✔

Adjusting the transmit output power

➥ Rotate [RF PWR].

• Adjustable range : 5 W to 200 W

(AM mode: 5 W to 50 W)

Microphone gain adjustment

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause inter-

ference to other stations on the same frequency.

q Push [METER] to select the ALC meter.

w Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.

• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.

e While talking into the microphone, rotate [MIC] so

that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go outside the

ALC zone. (see at left)

r Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.

ALC

52V

1.5

∞

100

150

200

250

SWR

COMP

60dB

ALC zone

[MIC] [METER]

Increases

max. 200 W

(50 W for AM)

Decreases

min. 5 W

[TRANSMIT]

[RF PWR]

[TX] indicator

Before transmitting, monitor your selected oper-

ating frequency to make sure transmitting won’t

cause interference to other stations on the same

frequency. It’s good amateur practice to listen

first, and then, even if nothing is heard, ask “is

the frequency in use” once or twice, before you

being operating on that frequency.

BASIC OPERATIONS

3-13

Drive gain adjustment

The drive gain is active for all modes except SSB with-

out speech compressor. The [DRIVE] control adjusts

the amplifying gain at the driver stage.

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause inter-

ference to other stations on the same frequency.

q Push [METER] to select the ALC meter.

w Push [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON, AM

or FM), key down (CW) or push [TRANSMIT] (RTTY

or PSK) to transmit.

e While talking into the microphone, keying down or

transmitting, rotate [DRIVE] so that the ALC meter

reading swinging within 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.

(see left)

• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.

r Release [PTT], stop keying or push [TRANSMIT]

again to return to receive.

[DRIVE][METER]

BASIC OPERATIONS

ALC

52V

1.5

∞

100

150

200

250

SWR

COMP

60dB

Drive gain range

4-1

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Section 4

■ Operating SSB ………………………………………………………… 4-2

D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-2

D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-3

D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) …………………4-3

■ Operating CW …………………………………………………………… 4-4

D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-4

D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-5

D About CW reverse mode ……………………………………………4-5

D About CW pitch control ………………………………………………4-5

D CW side tone function ………………………………………………4-5

D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation …………………………………4-6

D About 137 kHz band operation (Europe, UK, Italy, Spain, France

versions only) …………………………………………………………4-6

■ Electronic keyer functions ……………………………………………… 4-7

D Memory keyer screen …………………………………………………4-8

D Editing a memory keyer ………………………………………………4-9

D Contest number set mode …………………………………………4-10

D Keyer set mode ………………………………………………………4-11

■ Operating RTTY (FSK) ……………………………………………… 4-13

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-14

D About RTTY reverse mode …………………………………………4-14

D Twin peak filter ………………………………………………………4-14

D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication ………………………4-15

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-15

D RTTY memory transmission ………………………………………4-16

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-16

D Editing RTTY memory ………………………………………………4-17

D RTTY decode set mode ……………………………………………4-18

D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-20

■ Operating PSK ………………………………………………………… 4-21

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-22

D About BPSK and QPSK mode ……………………………………4-22

D Functions for the PSK decoder indication ………………………4-23

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-23

D PSK memory transmission …………………………………………4-24

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-24

D Editing PSK memory ………………………………………………4-25

D PSK decode set mode ………………………………………………4-26

D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-28

■ Operating AM ………………………………………………………… 4-29

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-29

D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-30

■ Operating FM ………………………………………………………… 4-31

D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-31

D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-31

■ Repeater operation …………………………………………………… 4-32

D Repeater tone frequency setting …………………………………4-32

■ Tone squelch operation ……………………………………………… 4-33

■ Data mode (AFSK) operation ………………………………………… 4-34

4-2

■ Operating SSB

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [SSB] to select LSB or USB.

• “USB” or “LSB” appears.

• Below 10 MHz LSB is automatically selected; above

10 MHz USB is automatically selected.

e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.

• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when

signal is received.

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-

mit.

• [TX] indicator lights red.

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice

level.

• Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if

necessary.

u Push [TRANSMIT] or release [PTT] (microphone) to

return to receive.

Convenient functions for receive

• Preamp (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp

OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON, respectively. (Main and sub have

independent preamp controls.)

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in

6 dB steps.

• Pushing [ATT] for 1 sec. to set the attenuator in 3 dB

steps.

• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-

ator is ON.

• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)

➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON

and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust

the threshold level.

• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights

when the noise blanker is ON.

• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode.

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)

➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).

• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.

• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)

➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level

set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]

then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.

• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)

➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON

and OFF.

• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights

when the noise reduction is ON.

• Auto notch filter (p. 5-19)

➥ Push [NOTCH] switch to turn the auto or manual

notch function ON and OFF.

• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the “valley” frequency

for manual notch operation.

• Notch indicator (above [NOTCH] switch) lights when

either the auto or manual notch is ON.

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)

➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select

AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.

➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant

manual setting ON and OFF.

• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.

• VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 9-3)

➥ Push [VSC] to turn the VSC function ON and

OFF.

• The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch

function is set to ON.

Appears

[MIC] [TX] indicator [RX] indicator

[AF] [SSB][TRANSMIT] Main dial

Band keys

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Convenient functions for transmit

About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only)

Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete

frequencies and must adhere to the following:

• USB mode

• Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)

• 2.8 kHz bandwidth

It’s your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-

mission in this band meets the stringent conditions

under which we may use these frequencies.

NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-

quencies, mode and filter settings into memory

channels for easy recall.

*The FCC specifies center frequencies on the

5 MHz band. However, the IC-7800 displays carri-

er frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to

1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center

frequency.

• Speech compressor (p. 6-5)

➥ Push [COMP] to turn the speech compressor ON

and OFF.

• Pushing [COMP] for 1 sec. to select the compression

bandwidth from wide, middle and narrow.

• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)

➥ Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn the VOX function ON

and OFF.

• “VOX” appears when the VOX function is ON.

• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)

➥ Push [MONI] to turn the monitor function ON and

OFF.

• Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain.

• Monitor indicator (above [MONI] switch) lights when

the monitor function is ON.

• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)

➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level

set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]

then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.

4-3

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

IC-7800 Tuning FCC Channel

Frequency* Center Frequency*

5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.36650 MHz 5.36800 MHz

5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz

To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within the

rules specified by the FCC, transmission is illegal on

any 5 MHz band frequency other than the 5 fre-

quencies indicated in the table above.

4-4

■ Operating CW

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [CW] to select CW.

• After CW mode is selected, push [CW] to toggle be-

tween CW and CW-R modes.

• “CW” or “CW-R” appears.

e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.

• Try to match the specified signal’s tone to the side tone

frequency.

• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when

signal is received.

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [TRANSMIT] to transmit.

• [TX] indicator lights red.

y Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW sig-

nals.

• The power meter indicates transmitted CW output

power.

u Adjust CW speed with [KEY SPEED].

• Adjustable within 6–60 WPM.

i Push [TRANSMIT] to return to receive.

Convenient functions for receive

• Preamp (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp

OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON. Main and sub have independent

preamp controls.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in

6 dB steps.

• Pushing [ATT] for 1 sec. to set the attenuator in 3 dB

steps.

• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-

ator is ON.

• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)

➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON

and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust

the threshold level.

• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights

when the noise blanker is ON.

• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode.

• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)

➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON

and OFF.

• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights

when the noise reduction is ON.

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)

➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).

• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.

• Manual notch filter (p. 5-19)

➥ Push [NOTCH] switch to turn the manual notch

function ON and OFF.

• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-

quency.

• Notch indicator (above [NOTCH] switch) lights when

either the manual notch is ON.

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)

➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select

AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.

➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant

manual setting ON and OFF.

• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.

•

⁄4 function (p. 3-6)

➥ Push [1/4] to turn the

⁄4 function ON and OFF.

• Auto tuning function (p. 1-9)

➥ Push [AUTO TUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-

tion ON and OFF.

• The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-

nal within a ±500 Hz range.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal

with interference, the automatic tuning function may

not tune properly, or tune onto an undesired signal.

Appears

[KEY SPEED]

[TX] indicator

[RX] indicator

[AF] [CW][TRANSMIT] Main dial

Band keys

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-5

Convenient functions for transmit

About CW reverse mode

CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side

band to receive CW signals.

Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal

and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interference.

➥ During CW mode, push [CW] to select CW and CW-

R mode.

About CW pitch control

The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone can

be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to

900 Hz in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the oper-

ating frequency.

➥ Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.

• Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz in 25 Hz steps.

CW side tone function

When the transceiver is in the receive condition (and

the break-in function is OFF— p. 6-3) you can listen to

the CW side tone without actually transmitting.

This allows you to match your transmit frequency ex-

actly to another station’s by matching the audio tone.

You can also use the CW side tone (be sure to turn

OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending. CW side tone

level can be adjusted with [MONI GAIN].

[MONI GAIN]

[CW PITCH]

Push

BFO

CW-R mode (USB side)

BFO

Desired signal

CW mode (LSB side)

Interference

Desired signalInterference

• Break-in function (p. 6-3)

➥ Push [VOX/BK-IN] several times to select the

break-in OFF, semi break-in and full break-in.

• “BK IN” or “F-BK IN” appears when the semi break-in

or full break-in function is ON, respectively.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-6

APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation

The APF changes the audio frequency response by

boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired

CW signal.

The peak frequency can be adjusted with [DIGI-SEL]

control when “APF” is selected for “DIGI-SEL VR Op-

eration” in miscellaneous (others) set mode (p. 12-18).

q During CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the audio

peak filter ON and OFF.

• “ ” appears in the display and [APF/TPF] indicator

above this switch lights green.

w Push [APF/TPF] for 1 sec. several times to select

the desired audio filter width.

• 320, 160 and 80 Hz filters are available.

e If “APF” is selected for “DIGI-SEL VR Operation,”

rotate [DIGI-SEL] control to suit your preference.

About 137 kHz band operation (Europe, UK, Italy, Spain, France versions only)

137 kHz band, within the 135.7 kHz to 137.8 kHz

range, operation in CW mode is optionally available

with the IC-7800.

The RF signal from [X-VERTER] is used for the

137 kHz band operation, and an external amplifier unit

is necessary.

See the connection diagram below for reference.

• Connection diagram for 137 kHz band operation

BPF

LPF

Power amplifier with T/R switching unit

for 137 kHz

to [X-VERTER]

to [RELAY] (for transmit/receive control)

to [ACC2] pin 6*

*Transverter ON/OFF control signal related to the power amplifier

unit main power, if desired.

• ON: 2–13.8 V DC input (more than 10 kΩ impedance)

• OFF: Less than 2 V DC

APF

[DIGI-SEL]

(SUB)

[DIGI-SEL]

(MAIN)

[APF/TPF]

(MAIN)

[APF/TPF]

(SUB)

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-7

■ Electronic keyer functions

The IC-7800 has a number of convenient functions for

the built-in electronic keyer.

q During CW mode, push [EXIT/SET] several times

to normal screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-3•KEYER] to select memory keyer screen.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu

screen.

r Push one of the multi-function keys ([F-1] to [F-4]) to

select the desired menu. See the diagram below.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display.

• Memory keyer screen (p. 4-8)

• Memory keyer menu screen

• Memory keyer edit screen (p. 4-9)

• Contest number set mode (p. 4-10)

• Keyer set mode screen (p. 4-11)

[EXIT/SET][CW][F-1]–[F-4]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-8

Memory keyer screen

Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send

menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using the

edit menu.

• Transmitting

q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to

select memory keyer screen.

w Push [TRANSMIT] to set the transceiver to trans-

mit, or set the break-in function ON (p. 6-3).

e Push one of the function keys ([F-1•M1] to [F-4•M4])

to send the contents of the memory keyer.

• Pushing a function key for 1 sec. repeatedly sends the

contents; push any function key to cancel the transmis-

sion.

• The contest serial number counter is incremented each

time the contents are sent.

• Push [F-5•–1] to reduce the contest serial number count

by 1 when resending contents to unanswered calls.

For your information

When an external keypad is connected to [EXT

KEYPAD] connector on the rear panel, the pro-

grammed contents, M1—M4, can be transmitted

without selecting the memory keyer screen.

See p. 2-6 for details.

r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to normal screen.

[CW][TRANSMIT] [F-1•M1]–[F-5•–1][EXIT/SET]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Memory keyer screen

4-9

Editing a memory keyer

The contents of the memory keyer memories can be

set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory

keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes

for often-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers,

etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac-

ters per memory channel.

• Programming contents

q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to

select memory keyer screen.

w Push [EXIT•SET] to select memory keyer menu,

then push [F-2•EDIT] to select keyer edit screen.

• Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) is selected.

e Push [F-7•M1..M4] several times to select the de-

sired memory keyer channel to be edited.

r Push [ABC] or [123] or [Symbol] to select the char-

acter group, then rotate the main dial to select the

character, or push the keypad for number input.

• [Symbol] appears when [123] is pushed when “123”

character group is selected.

• Selectable characters (using the main dial);

NOTE:

“^” is used to transmit a following word with no

space such as AR. Put “^” before a text string

such as ^AR, and the string “AR ” is sent with no

space.

“✱” is used to insert the CW contest serial num-

ber. The serial number automatically increments

by 1. This function is only available for one mem-

ory keyer channel at a time. Memory keyer chan-

nel M2 used “✱” by default.

✔

For your convenience

When a PC keyboard is connected to [KEYBOARD]

connector on the rear panel, the memory keyer con-

tents can also be edited from the keyboard.

t Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] to move the cursor back-

wards or forwards, respectively.

• Pushing [F-3•DEL] deletes a character and [F-4•SPACE]

inserts a space.

y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired charac-

ters.

u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return normal screen.

[F-1•Ω]

[ABC][123]/[Symbol]

[F-7•M1..M4][EXIT/SET][F-2•≈]

[F-3•DEL] [F-4•SPACE]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Memory keyer edit screen

Key selection Editable characters

A to Z (capital letters)

0 to 9 (numbers)

/ ? ^ . , @ ✱

• Example— entered “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST”

into memory keyer channel 3

CH Contents

M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST

M2 UR 5NN✱ BK

M3 CFM TU

M4 QRZ?

• Pre-programmed contents

4-10

Contest number set mode

This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number

and count up trigger, etc.

• Setting contents

q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to

select memory keyer screen.

w Push [EXIT•SET] to select memory keyer menu,

then push [F-3•001] to select contest serial number

set mode.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set

item.

r Set the desired condition using the main dial.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default condition

or value.

• Contest number set mode screen t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to normal screen.

[F-1•Y] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-2•Z][F-4•DEF]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

This item sets the numbering system used for contest

(serial) numbers— normal or short morse numbers.

• Normal : Does not use short morse numbers

(default)

• 190➔ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.

• 190➔ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.

•90➔ NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.

•90➔ NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.

This selects which of the four memories will contain

the contest serial number exchange. The count-up

trigger allows the serial number to automatically in-

cremented after each complete serial number ex-

change is sent.

• M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2)

This item shows the current number for the count-up

trigger channel set above.

• Rotate the main dial to change the number, or push

[F-3•001CLR] for 1 sec. to reset the current number

to 001.

4-11

Keyer set mode

This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat

time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type,

etc.

• Setting contents

q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to

select memory keyer screen.

w Push [EXIT•SET] to select memory keyer menu,

then push [F-4•CW KEY] to select keyer set mode.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set

item.

r Set the desired condition using the main dial.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default condition

or value.

• Keyer set mode screen t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to normal screen.

[F-1•Y] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-2•Z][F-4•DEF]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item

sets the time between transmission.

• 1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected.

(default: 2 sec.)

This item sets the dot/dash ratio.

Keying weight example: Morse code “K”

• 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.

(default: 1:1:3.0)

DASH

Weight setting:

1:1:3 (default)

Weight setting:

Adjusted

DASH

DOT (fixed*)

Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)

*SPACE and DOT length can be

adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only.

This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW en-

velope.

• 2, 4, 6 or 8 msec. can be selected. (default: 4 msec.)

Key action

Tx output power

• About rise time

Rise time

Set Tx power level

Time

to be continued…

4-12

Keyer set mode (continued)

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

This item sets the paddle polarity. • Normal and reverse polarity can be selected.

This item selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY] con-

nector on the front panel.

• ELEC-KEY, BUG-KEY and Straight key can be se-

lected. (default: ELEC-KEY)

This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/[DN]

keys to be used as a paddle.

• ON : [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.

• OFF : [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for

CW.

NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and

memory channel cannot be changed using

the [UP]/[DN] switches.

4-13

■ Operating RTTY (FSK)

A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/de-

coder is built-in to the IC-7800. When connecting a PC

keyboard (p. 2-6), RTTY operation can be performed

without an external RTTY terminal, TNC or PC.

If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC,

consult the manual that comes with the RTTY terminal

or TNC.

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY.

• After RTTY mode is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] for

1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.

e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decoder screen.

• The IC-7800 has a built-in Baudot decoder.

r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical

wave form and ensure the peak points align with the

mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency lines

in the FFT scope.

• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when

signal is received.

t Press [F12] on the connected keyboard to transmit.

• [TX] indicator lights red.

y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that

you want to transmit.

• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer

screen and transmitted immediately.

• The text color will be changed when transmitted.

• Press one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con-

tents.

u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.

✔

For your convenience

The transmission contents can be typed before being

transmitted.

q Perform the steps q to r above.

w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the

message that you want to transmit.

• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer

screen.

e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit

the typewritten contents.

• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will

be changed when transmitted.

• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice.

r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.

FFT scope

TX buffer screen

RX contents screen

Water-fall

Appears

[TX] indicator [RX] indicator

[F-3•DECODE] [RTTY/PSK][AF] Main dial

Band keys

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-14

Convenient functions for receive

About RTTY reverse mode

Received characters are occasionally garbled when

the received signal has Mark and Space tones re-

versed. This reversal can be caused by incorrect TNC

connections, setting, commands, etc. To receive re-

versed RTTY signals correctly, select RTTY-R mode.

➥ During RTTY mode, push [RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to

select RTTY and RTTY-R mode.

Twin peak filter

The twin peak filter changes audio frequency response

by boosting the mark and space frequencies (2125 and

2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY signals.

➥ During RTTY mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the twin

peak filter ON and OFF.

• “ ” appears in the LCD and the [APF/TPF] indicator

above this switch lights green while the filter is in use.

NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the re-

ceived audio output may increase. This is a normal,

not a malfunction.

TPF

[APF/TPF]

(SUB)

[APF/TPF]

(MAIN)

Normal Reverse

Space

Mark

BFO

Space

Mark

BFO

170 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz2125 Hz

• Preamp (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp

OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON. Main and sub have independent

preamp controls.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in

6 dB steps.

• Pushing [ATT] for 1 sec. to set the attenuator in 3 dB

steps.

• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-

ator is ON.

• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)

➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON

and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust

the threshold level.

• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights

when the noise blanker is ON.

• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode.

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)

➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).

• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.

• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)

➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON

and OFF.

• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights

when the noise reduction is ON.

• Auto notch filter (p. 5-19)

➥ Push [NOTCH] switch to turn the manual notch

function ON and OFF.

• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-

quency.

• Notch indicator (above [NOTCH] switch) lights when

either the manual notch is ON.

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)

➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select

AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.

➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant

manual setting ON and OFF.

• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.

•

⁄4 function (p. 3-6)

➥ Push [1/4] to turn the

⁄4 function ON and OFF.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-15

Functions for the RTTY decoder indication

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY.

• After RTTY mode is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] for

1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.

e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decoder screen.

• When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters

are displayed in the RX contents screen.

r Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] to freeze the current screen.

• “ ” appears while the function is in use.

• Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] again to release the function.

t Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the dis-

played characters.

• “ ” indicator disappears at the same time when the

hold function is in use.

y Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the RTTY decode screen

size from normal and wide.

• S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be

selected in display set mode. (pgs. 3-11, 12-11)

u Push [F-6•MAIN/SUB] to toggle the MAIN and SUB

band for decode operation.

• Dualwatch function (p. 5-16) should be ON when SUB

band is selected for decode operation.

i Push [EXIT/SET] to close the RTTY decode screen.

• Wide screen indication

Setting the decoder threshold level

Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some char-

acters are displayed when no signal is received.

q Select the RTTY decoder screen as described

above.

w Push [F-5•ADJ] to select the threshold level setting

condition.

e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder

threshold level.

• Push [F-6•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default setting.

r Push [F-5•ADJ] to exit from the threshold level set-

ting condition.

The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new

line code can be set in the RTTY set mode. (p. 4-

18)

HOLD

[F-6•MAIN/SUB] [F-7•WIDE]

[F-2•HOLD/CLR]

[RTTY/PSK] [EXIT/SET]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-16

RTTY memory transmission

Pre-set characters can be sent using the RTTY mem-

ory. Contents of the memory are set using the edit

menu.

q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select RTTY decode screen.

w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select RTTY memory

screen.

e Push [F-7•1–4/5–8] to select memory bank then

push one of the function keys ([F-1•RT1] to

[F-4•RT4] or [F-1•RT5] to [F-4•RT8]).

• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory

contents will be transmitted immediately.

• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents

will be transmitted immediately when function key is

pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected key-

board is pressed, depending on auto transmission/re-

ception setting (see below).

• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time

may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on

setting.

Automatic transmission/reception setting

q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select RTTY decode screen.

w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select RTTY memory

screen, then push [F-6•EDIT] to select RTTY mem-

ory edit screen.

•

RTTY m

emory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is se-

lected.

e Push [F-7•RT1..RT8] several times to select the de-

sired RTTY memory.

r Push [F-6•AUTO TX] several times to select the de-

sired condition as follow.

• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the se-

lected memory and returns to re-

ceive after the transmission.

• AUTO TX : Automatically transmits the se-

lected memory. To return to re-

ceive, press [F12] on the key-

board.

• AUTO RX : Press [F12] on the keyboard to

transmit the selected memory. Au-

tomatically returns to receive after

the transmission.

• No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to

transmit the selected memory and

press [F12] again to return to re-

ceive.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit RTTY memory edit condi-

tion.

NOTE: The transceiver always functions as the

“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-

nected.

[F-6•AUTO TX] [F-7•RT1..RT8][EXIT/SET]

[F-7•1–4/5–8][F-1•RT1]–[F-4•RT4]

[F-1•RT5]–[F-4•RT8]

[EXIT/SET]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-17

Editing RTTY memory

The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using

the memory edit menu. The memory can store and re-

transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY infor-

mation. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters

per memory channel.

• Programming contents

q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select RTTY decode screen.

w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select RTTY memory

screen, then push [F-6•EDIT] to select RTTY mem-

ory edit screen.

• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is se-

lected.

e Push [F-7•RT1..RT8] to several times to select the

desired RTTY memory channel to be edited.

r Push [F-5•Ω≈] to select the edit item between

memory contents and memory name.

t Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to select

the character, or push the keypad for number input.

• [abc] appears when [ABC] is pushed when “ABC” char-

acter group is selected, and [Symbol] appears when

[123] is pushed when “123” character group is selected.

• Selectable characters (with the main dial);

✔

For your convenience

When a PC keyboard is connected to [KEYBOARD]

connector on the rear panel, the RTTY memory

contents can also be edited from the keyboard.

y Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] to move the cursor back-

wards or forwards, respectively.

• Pushing [F-3•DEL] deletes a character and [F-4•SPACE]

inserts a space.

u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired charac-

ters.

i Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit RTTY

memory edit screen.

[F-1•Ω]

[ABC]/[abc][123]/[Symbol]

[F-7•RT1..RT8][EXIT/SET][F-2•≈]

[F-3•DEL] [F-4•SPACE]

[F-5•Ω≈]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• RTTY memory edit screen

Key selection Editable characters

A to Z (capital letters)

a to z (small letters)

(selectable for memory name only)

0 to 9 (numbers)

! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; =

< > ( ) [ ] { } | _

(For the memory contents set-

ting, ! $ & ? “ ‘ – / . , : ; ( ) ↵ are

selectable.)

CH Name Contents

RT1 MYCALLx2 ↵DE ICOM ICOM K↵

RT2 MYCALLx3 ↵DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵

RT3 QSLUR599 ↵QSL UR 599–599 BK↵

RT4 DE+UR599 ↵QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599

BK↵

RT5 73 GL SK ↵73 GL SK↵

RT6 CQ CQ CQ ↵CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM

K↵

RT7 RIG&ANT ↵MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7800 &

ANTENNA IS A 3–ELEMENT

TRIBAND YAGI.↵

RT8 EQUIP. ↵MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS

INTERNAL FSK UNIT &

DEMODULATOR OF THE

IC–7800.↵

• Pre-programmed contents

4-18

RTTY decode set mode

This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-

tion, time stamp setting, etc.

• Setting contents

q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select RTTY decode screen.

w Push [F-1•<MENU2>] to select RTTY decode menu

2, then push [F-6•SET] to select RTTY decode set

mode.

• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size from normal

and wide.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set

item.

r Set the desired condition using the main dial.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default condition

or value.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select the set contents for some

items.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

[F-1•Y] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-2•Z][F-4•DEF]

[F-3•Ω ≈] [F-7•WIDE]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• RTTY decode set mode screen

Turn the letter code decoding after receiving a “space”

(USOS; UnShift On Space function) capability ON

and OFF.

• ON : Decode as letter code.

• OFF : Decode as character code.

Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY de-

coder.

CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed

• CR,LF,CR;LF : Makes new line with any codes.

• CR+LF : Makes new line with CR+LF code

only.

Selects the diddle condition. • BLANK : Transmits blank code during no code

transmission.

• LTRS : Transmits letter code during no code

transmission.

• OFF : Turns the diddle function OFF.

Set the FFT scope waveform averaging function from

2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)

Recommendation!

If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use the

default or smaller number setting is recommended.

Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

4-19

RTTY decode set mode (continued)

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Explicitly inserts the FIGS character even thought it is

not required by the receiving station.

• ON : Inserts FIGS.

• OFF : Does not insert FIGS.

Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception

time) indication ON and OFF.

• ON : Displays the time stamp.

• OFF : No time stamp indication.

Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage.

NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is

selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.

• Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”

• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”

*The name of choice may differ according to

“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p, 11-2). “UTC” is the

default name of CLOCK2.

Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans-

mission capability.

• ON : Transmits CR+LF code once.

• OFF : Transmits no CR+LF code.

Set the text color for transmitted characters.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Selects the operating frequency indication for time

stamp usage.

NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when “OFF”

is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.

• ON : Displays the operating frequency.

• OFF : No operating frequency display.

Set the text color for received characters.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Set the text color for time stamp indication.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Set the text color in the TX buffer screen.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

4-20

Data saving

The contents of the RTTY memory and received sig-

nal can be saved into the CF memory card.

q During RTTY decode screen indication, push

[F-1•<MENU1>] to select RTTY decode menu 2.

w Push [F-5•SAVE] to select decode file save screen.

e Change the following conditions if desired.

• File name:

z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-

dition.

• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the

file name, if necessary.

x Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to

select the character.

• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (nu-

merals); [Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~

@ can be selected.

• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]

to move the cursor right, [F-3•DEL] delete a char-

acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

• File format

z Push [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option

screen.

x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-

mat from Text to HTML.

• “Text” is the default setting.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default set-

ting.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous in-

dication.

• Saving location

z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view

screen.

x Select the desired directory or folder in the CF

memory card.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] to select the upper directory.

• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the

same directory.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] for 1 sec. to select a folder in the

directory.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete the

folder.

• Push [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a new

folder. (Edit the name with the same manner as

the “• File name” above.)

c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file

name.

r Push [F-6•SAVE].

• After the saving is completed, returns to RTTY decode

menu 2 automatically.

[F-1•DIR/FILE] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-4•EDIT]

[F-5•OPTION] [F-6•SAVE] [F-7•WIDE]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Decode file save screen

• Decode file save screen— file name edit

• Save option screen

✔

For your convenience!

Two formats, Text and HTML, are available for storage

of data to your PC.

4-21

■ Operating PSK

A high-quality DSP-based PSK31 encoder/decoder is

built-in to the IC-7800. When connecting a PC key-

board (p. 2-6), PSK31 operation can be performed

without PSK software installed on your PC.

If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-

sult the manual that comes with the software.

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK.

• After PSK mode is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec.

to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.

• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.

Push [F-3•DECODE] to displays the decoder screen.

• The IC-7800 has a built-in PSK31 decoder.

r Tune the desired signal with the main dial.

• The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in

the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the exam-

ple below.

• The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be

displayed sporadically.

• When a PSK signal is received, the water-fall display is

activated.

• The water-fall display shows the signal condition within

the passband and a vertical line appears when a PSK

signal is received.

t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit.

• [TX] indicator lights red.

y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the

message that you want to transmit.

• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer

screen and transmitted immediately.

• The text color will be changed when transmitted.

• Press one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con-

tents.

u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.

✔

For your convenience

The transmission contents can be typed before being

transmitted.

q Perform the steps q to r above.

w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the

message that you want to transmit.

• The message is shown in the TX buffer screen.

e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit

the message.

• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will

be changed when transmitted.

• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice.

r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.

FFT scope

Vector tuning indicator

TX buffer screen

RX contents screen

Water-fall

Appears

[TX] indicator [RX] indicator

[F-3•DECODE] [RTTY/PSK][AF] Main dial

Band keys

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Vector tuning indicator indication example

Tuned BPSK signal

BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal

Tuned QPSK signal

4-22

Convenient functions for receive

About BPSK and QPSK mode

BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK31.

• BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the most

commonly used mode.

• QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode has

error correction capability to provide better decoding

than BPSK mode in marginal condition. However,

more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode,

due to the tight phase margin of QPSK.

q During PSK mode selection, push [F-3•DECODE]

to display the PSK decode screen.

w Push [F-1•<MENU1>] to select PSK decode menu

e Push [F-2•B/QPSK] to toggle between BPSK and

QPSK mode alternately.

[F-3•DECODE][F-2•B/QPSK][F-1•<MENU1>]

• Preamp (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp

OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON. Main and sub have independent

preamp controls.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in

6 dB steps.

• Pushing [ATT] for 1 sec. to set the attenuator in 3 dB

steps.

• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-

ator is ON.

• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)

➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON

and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust

the threshold level.

• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights

when the noise blanker is ON.

• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode.

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)

➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).

• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.

• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)

➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON

and OFF.

• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights

when the noise reduction is ON.

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)

➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select

AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.

➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant

manual setting ON and OFF.

• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.

• Fine tuning (p. 3-7)

➥ During PSK, make sure that the kHz tuning step

function is OFF (no “Z” indication), push [TS] for

1 sec.

• PSK may not be decoded correctly using the 10 Hz

step tuning.

•

⁄4 function (p. 3-6)

➥ Push [1/4] to turn the

⁄4 function ON and OFF.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• PSK decode screen— BPSK mode

• PSK decode screen— QPSK mode

4-23

Functions for the PSK decoder indication

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK.

• After PSK mode is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec.

to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.

• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.

e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decoder screen.

• When tuned into a PSK signal, decoded characters are

displayed in the RX contents screen.

r Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] to freeze the current screen.

• “ ” appears while the function is in use.

• Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] again to release the function.

t Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the dis-

played characters.

• “ ” indicator disappears at the same time when the

hold function is in use.

y Push [F-3•AFC/NET] to turn the AFC function ON.

• “ ” appears.

• If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range,

the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the

offset frequency is displayed.

• The AFC tuning range is set to ±15 Hz as the default.

Optional ±8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set

mode. (p. 2)

u Push [F-3•AFC/NET] again to turn the NET function

ON.

• “ ” appears additionally.

i Push [F-3•AFC/NET] for 1 sec. to add the offset fre-

quency to the displayed frequency.

o Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the PSK decode screen

size from normal and wide.

• S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be

selected in display set mode. (pgs. 3-11, 12-11)

!0 Push [F-6•MAIN/SUB] to toggle the MAIN and SUB

band for decode operation.

• Dualwatch function (p. 5-16) should be ON when SUB

band is selected for decode operation.

!1 Push [EXIT/SET] to close the PSK decode screen.

Setting the decoder threshold level

Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-

acters are displayed when no signal is received.

q Call up the PSK decoder screen as described

above.

w Push [F-5•ADJ] to select the threshold level setting

condition.

e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder

threshold level.

• Push [F-6•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default setting.

r Push [F-5•ADJ] to exit from the threshold level set-

ting condition.

NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal

properly when a weak PSK signal is received.

• AFC/NET indications

“AFC” and “NET” indicators Offset frequency

HOLD

[F-3•AFC/NET] [F-6•MAIN/SUB] [F-7•WIDE]

[F-2•HOLD/CLR]

[RTTY/PSK] [EXIT/SET]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-24

PSK memory transmission

Pre-set characters can be sent using the PSK memo-

ry. Contents of the memory are set using the edit

menu.

q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select PSK decode screen.

w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select PSK memory screen.

e Push [F-7•1–4/5–8] to select memory bank then

push one of the function keys ([F-1•PT1] to

[F-4•PT4] or [F-1•PT5] to [F-4•PT8]).

• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory

contents will be transmitted immediately.

• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents

will be transmitted immediately when function key is

pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected key-

board is pressed, depending on auto transmission/re-

ception setting (see below).

• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time

may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on

setting.

Automatic transmission/reception setting

q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select PSK decode screen.

w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select PSK memory screen,

then push [F-6•EDIT] to select PSK memory edit

screen.

• PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected.

e Push [F-7•PT1..PT8] several times to select the de-

sired RTTY memory.

r Push [F-6•AUTO TX] several times to select the de-

sired condition, as follows.

• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the se-

lected memory and returns to re-

ceive after the transmission.

• AUTO TX : Automatically transmits the se-

lected memory. To return to re-

ceive, press [F12] on the key-

board.

• AUTO RX : Press [F12] on the keyboard to

transmit the selected memory. Au-

tomatically returns to receive after

the transmission.

• No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to

transmit the selected memory and

press [F12] again to return to re-

ceive.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to exit from PSK mem-

ory edit condition.

NOTE: The transceiver always functions as the

“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-

nected.

[F-6•AUTO TX] [F-7•PT1..PT8][EXIT/SET]

[F-7•1–4/5–8][F-1•PT1]–[F-4•PT4]

[F-1•PT5]–[F-4•PT8]

[EXIT/SET]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-25

Editing PSK memory

The contents of the PSK memories can be set using

the memory edit menu. The memory can store 8 PSK

messages for often-used PSK information. Total

capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory

channel.

• Programming contents

q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select PSK decode screen.

w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select PSK memory screen,

then push [F-6•EDIT] to select PSK memory edit

screen.

• PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 (PT1) is se-

lected.

e Push [F-7•PT1..PT8] several times to select the de-

sired PSK memory channel to be edited.

r Push [F-5•Ω≈] to select the edit item between

memory contents and memory name.

t Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to select

the character, or push the keypad for number input.

• [abc] appears when [ABC] is pushed when “ABC” char-

acter group is selected, and [Symbol] appears when

[123] is pushed when “123” character group is selected.

• Selectable characters (with the main dial);

✔

For your convenience

When a PC keyboard is connected to [KEYBOARD]

connector on the rear panel, the PSK memory con-

tents can also be edited from the keyboard.

y Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] to move the cursor back-

wards or forwards, respectively.

• Pushing [F-3•DEL] deletes a character and [F-4•SPACE]

inserts a space.

u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired charac-

ters.

i Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit PSK

memory edit screen.

[F-1•Ω]

[ABC]/[abc][123]/[Symbol]

[F-7•PT1..PT8][EXIT/SET][F-2•≈]

[F-3•DEL] [F-4•SPACE]

[F-5•Ω≈]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Key selection Editable characters

A to Z (capital letters)

a to z (small letters)

0 to 9 (numbers)

! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; =

< > ( ) [ ] { } | _

@ ↵

(“↵” is for the memory contents set-

ting only.)

CH Name Contents

PT1 MYCALLx2 ↵DE Icom Icom K↵

PT2 MYCALLx3 ↵DE Icom Icom Icom K↵

PT3 QSLUR599 ↵QSL UR 599 599 BK↵

PT4 DE+UR599 ↵QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599

BK↵

PT5 73 GL SK ↵73 GL SK↵

PT6 CQ CQ CQ ↵CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom

K↵

PT7 RIG&ANT ↵My transceiver is IC–7800 &

Antenna is a 3–element triband

yagi.↵

PT8 EQUIP. ↵My PSK equipment is internal

modulator & demodulator of the

IC–7800.↵

• Pre-programmed contents

• PSK memory edit screen

4-26

PSK decode set mode

This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-

tion, time stamp setting, etc.

• Setting contents

q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]

to select PSK decode screen.

w Push [F-1•<MENU2>] to select PSK decode menu

2, then push [F-6•SET] to select PSK decode set

mode.

• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size from normal

and wide.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set

item.

r Set the desired condition using the main dial.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default condition

or value.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select the set contents for some

items.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

[F-1•Y] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-2•Z][F-4•DEF]

[F-3•Ω ≈] [F-7•WIDE]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception

time) display ON and OFF.

• ON : Displays the time stamp.

• OFF : No time stamp display.

Selects the clock display for time stamp usage.

NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is

selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as above.

• Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”

• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”

*The name of choice may differ according to

“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p, 11-2). “UTC” is the

default name of CLOCK2.

Set the FFT scope waveform averaging function from

2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)

Recommendation!

If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using

the default or smaller number setting is recom-

mended.

Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) func-

tion operating range from ±15 Hz (default) and ±8 Hz.

NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal

properly when a weak PSK signal is received.

4-27

PSK decode set mode (continued)

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Selects the operating frequency display for time

stamp usage.

NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when

“OFF” is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as

below left.

• ON : Displays the operating frequency.

• OFF : No operating frequency display.

Set the text color for received characters.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Set the text color for transmitted characters.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Set the text color for time stamp indication.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

Set the text color in the TX buffer screen.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),

and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

4-28

Data saving

The contents of the PSK memory and received signal

can be saved into the CF memory card.

q During PSK decode screen indication, push

[F-1•<MENU1>] to select PSK decode menu 2.

w Push [F-5•SAVE] to select decode file save screen.

e Change the following conditions if desired.

• File name:

z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-

dition.

• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the

file name, if necessary.

x Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to

select the character.

• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (nu-

merals); [Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~

@ can be selected.

• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]

to move the cursor right, [F-3•DEL] delete a char-

acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

• File format

z Push [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option

screen.

x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-

mat from Text and HTML.

• “Text” is the default setting.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default set-

ting.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous in-

dication.

• Saving location

z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view

screen.

x Select the desired directory or folder in the CF

memory card.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] to select the upper directory.

• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the

same directory.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] for 1 sec. to select a folder in the

directory.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete the

folder.

• Push [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to make a new folder.

(Edit the name with the same manner as the

“• File name” above.)

c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file

name.

r Push [F-6•SAVE].

• After the saving is completed, return to PSK decode

menu 2 automatically.

[F-1•DIR/FILE] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-4•EDIT]

[F-5•OPTION] [F-6•SAVE] [F-7•WIDE]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Decode file save screen

• Decode file save screen— file name edit

• Save option screen

✔

For your convenience!

Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for

PC data storage.

4-29

■ Operating AM

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [AM/FM] to select AM.

• “AM” indicator appears.

• After AM mode is selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle be-

tween AM and FM modes.

e Rotate the main dial to tune the desired frequency.

• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when

signal is received.

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-

mit.

• The TX indicator lights red.

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice

level.

• Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if

necessary.

u Push [TRANSMIT] or release [PTT] (microphone) to

return to receive.

Convenient functions for receive

• Preamp (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp

OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON. Main and sub have independent

preamp controls.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in

6 dB steps.

• Pushing [ATT] for 1 sec. to set the attenuator in 3 dB

steps.

• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-

ator is ON.

• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)

➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON

and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust

the threshold level.

• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights

when the noise blanker is ON.

• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode.

• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)

➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON

and OFF.

• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights

when the noise reduction is ON.

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)

➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).

• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.

• Notch filter (p. 5-19)

➥ Push [NOTCH] switch to turn the manual notch

function ON and OFF.

• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-

quency.

• Notch indicator (above [NOTCH] switch) lights when

either the manual notch is ON.

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)

➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select

AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.

➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant

manual setting ON and OFF.

• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.

• Auto tuning function (p. 1-9)

➥ Push [AUTO TUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-

tion ON and OFF.

• The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-

nal within ±5 kHz range.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal

with interference, the automatic tuning function may

not tune, or may tune to an undesired signal.

Appears

[TX] indicator

[MIC]

[RX] indicator

[AM/FM][AF] Main dial

Band keys

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-30

Convenient functions for transmit

• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)

➥ Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn the VOX function ON

and OFF.

• “VOX” appears when the VOX function is ON.

• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)

➥ Push [MONI] to turn the monitor function ON and

OFF.

• Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain.

• Monitor indicator (above [MONI] switch) lights when

the monitor function is ON.

• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)

➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level

set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]

then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-31

■ Operating FM

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [AM/FM] to select FM.

• “FM” indicator appears.

• After FM mode is selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle be-

tween FM and AM modes.

e Rotate the main dial to tune the desired frequency.

• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when

signal is received.

• 10 kHz tuning step is preset for the FM mode.

• Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired filter

width.

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-

mit.

• The TX indicator lights red.

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice

level.

• Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if

necessary.

• FM narrow transmission is available when “FIL2” or

“FIL3” is selected.

u Push [TRANSMIT] or release [PTT] (microphone) to

return to receive.

Convenient functions for receive

Convenient functions for transmit

• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)

➥ Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn the VOX function ON

and OFF.

• “VOX” appears when the VOX function is ON.

• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)

➥ Push [MONI] to turn the monitor function ON and

OFF.

• Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain.

• Monitor indicator (above [MONI] switch) lights when

the monitor function is ON.

• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)

➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level

set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]

then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.

• Preamp (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp

OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON. Main and sub have independent

preamp controls.

• Auto notch filter (p. 5-19)

➥ Push [NOTCH] switch to turn the auto notch func-

tion ON and OFF.

• Notch indicator (above [NOTCH] switch) lights when

either the manual notch is ON.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in

6 dB steps.

• Pushing [ATT] for 1 sec. to set the attenuator in 3 dB

steps.

• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-

ator is ON.

Appears

[TX] indicator

[MIC]

[RX] indicator

[AM/FM][AF] Main dial

Band keys [FILTER]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-32

■ Repeater operation

A repeater amplifies received signals and retransmits

them at a different frequency. When using a repeater,

the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre-

quency by an offset frequency. A repeater can be ac-

cessed using split frequency operation with the shift

frequency set to the repeater’s offset frequency.

For accessing a repeater which requires a repeater

tone, set the repeater tone frequency in tone fre-

quency set mode as described below.

q Set the offset frequencies (HF, 50 MHz) and turn

ON the quick split function in miscellaneous (others)

set mode in advance. (p. 12-15)

w Push [V/M] to select VFO mode.

e Push the desired band key.

r Push [AM/FM] several times to select FM mode.

t Set the receive frequency (repeater output fre-

quency).

y Push [SPLIT] for 1 sec. to start repeater operation.

• Repeater tone is turned ON automatically.

• [SPLIT] indicator lights and “ ” appears on the

LCD.

• Shifted transmit frequency and “TX” appear in the sub

band.

• The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing

[XFC] or using dualwatch.

u Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to

receive.

i To return to simplex, push [SPLIT] momentarily.

Repeater tone frequency setting

Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac-

cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed over your

normal signal and must be set in advance. The trans-

ceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.

q Select FM mode.

w Push [TONE] for 1 sec. to tone frequency set mode.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select REPEATER

TONE item.

r Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater

tone frequency.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default setting.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-

tion.

• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)

[AM/FM][F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] Main dial

[F-4•DEF][TONE]

[V/M]

[AM/FM] [XFC] [SPLIT]Main dial

Band keys[SPLIT] indicator

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

67.0

69.3

71.9

74.4

77.0

79.7

82.5

085.4

088.5

091.5

094.8

097.4

100.0

103.5

107.2

110.9

114.8

118.8

123.0

127.3

131.8

136.5

141.3

146.2

151.4

156.7

159.8

162.2

165.5

167.9

171.3

173.8

177.3

179.9

183.5

186.2

189.9

192.8

196.6

199.5

203.5

206.5

210.7

218.1

225.7

229.1

233.6

241.8

250.3

254.1

4-33

■ Tone squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when receiving a signal

containing a matching subaudible tone. You can

silently wait for calls from group members using the

same tone.

q Set the desired frequency band and select FM

mode.

w Push [TONE] to turn the tone squelch function ON.

• “TSQL” appears

e Push [TONE] for 1 sec. to tone frequency set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select T-SQL TONE

item.

t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone

squelch frequency.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default setting.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-

tion.

u When the received signal includes a matching tone,

squelch opens and the signal can be heard.

• When the received signal’s tone does not match, tone

squelch does not open, however, the S-indicator shows

signal strength.

• To open the squelch manually, push [XFC].

i Operate the transceiver in the normal way.

o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] to clear

“TSQL.”

• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)

[AM/FM][F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] Main dial

[F-4•DEF][TONE]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

67.0

69.3

71.9

74.4

77.0

79.7

82.5

085.4

088.5

091.5

094.8

097.4

100.0

103.5

107.2

110.9

114.8

118.8

123.0

127.3

131.8

136.5

141.3

146.2

151.4

156.7

159.8

162.2

165.5

167.9

171.3

173.8

177.3

179.9

183.5

186.2

189.9

192.8

196.6

199.5

203.5

206.5

210.7

218.1

225.7

229.1

233.6

241.8

250.3

254.1

4-34

■ Data mode (AFSK) operation

When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC

and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes

with the TNC and/or the software.

q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. 2-8)

w Push a band key to select the desired band.

e Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the desired oper-

ating mode.

r Push [DATA] to turn data mode ON.

• One of “-D1,” “-D2” or “-D3” is additionally appears.

• During data mode selection, pushing [DATA] for 1 sec.

to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) and 3 (D3) in se-

quence.

t Rotate the main dial to tune into the desired signal

and decoded correctly.

• Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software.

• During SSB data mode,

⁄4 tuning function can be used

for critical tuning.

y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit.

• When operating in SSB data mode, adjust the TNC out-

put level so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go out-

side the ALC zone.

NOTE: When SSB data mode is selected, the audio

input from the [ACC1] (pin 6) is used for transmis-

sion instead of [MIC]’s.

The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis-

sion as follows:

• [COMP] : OFF

• Tx bandwidth : MID

• Tx Tone (Bass) : 0

• Tx Tone (Trebles): 0

✔

For your information

Carrier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode

is selected.

See the diagram left for the tone-pair example.

200 Hz 2125 Hz

2325 Hz

Carrier frequency

(displayed frequency)

Appears

[AM/FM][SSB][AF] [DATA] Main dial

Band keys

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

5-1

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Section 5

■ Spectrum scope screen ……………………………………………… 5-2

D Center mode ………………………………………………………… 5-2

D Fix mode ……………………………………………………………… 5-3

D Mini scope screen indication ……………………………………… 5-4

D Scope set mode ……………………………………………………… 5-4

■ Preamplifier ……………………………………………………………… 5-9

■ Attenuator ……………………………………………………………… 5-9

■ RIT function …………………………………………………………… 5-10

D RIT monitor function …………………………………………………5-10

■ AGC function …………………………………………………………… 5-11

D Selecting the preset value …………………………………………5-11

D Adjusting the AGC time constant …………………………………5-11

D Setting the AGC time constant preset value ………………………5-11

■ Twin PBT operation …………………………………………………… 5-12

■ IF filter selection ……………………………………………………… 5-13

D IF filter selection …………………………………………………… 5-13

D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) ……………… 5-13

D Roofing filter selection ……………………………………………… 5-14

D DSP filter shape …………………………………………………… 5-14

D Filter shape set mode ……………………………………………… 5-14

■ Dualwatch operation ………………………………………………… 5-16

■ Noise blanker ………………………………………………………… 5-17

D NB set mode ………………………………………………………… 5-17

■ Noise reduction ………………………………………………………… 5-18

■ Dial lock function ……………………………………………………… 5-18

■ Notch function ………………………………………………………… 5-19

■ Digital selector ………………………………………………………… 5-19

5-2

■ Spectrum scope screen

This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to display

the conditions on the selected band, as well as relative

strengths of signals. The IC-7800 has two modes for

the spectrum indication— one is center mode, and an-

ther one is fix mode.

In addition, the IC-7800 has a mini scope screen to

save screen space.

Center mode

Displays signals around the set frequency within the

selected span. The set frequency is always displayed

at the center of the screen.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.

e Push [F-5•CENT/FIX] to select the center mode.

• “ ” is displayed when center mode is selected.

r Push [F-1•SPAN] several times to select the scope

span.

• ±2.5, ±5.0, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100 and ±250 kHz are avail-

able.

• Sweeping speed is selectable for each span indepen-

dently in scope set mode. (pgs. 5-5, 5-6)

t Push [F-2•ATT] several times to activate an attenu-

ator or turn the attenuator OFF.

• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.

y Push [F-6•MAIN/SUB] to select main band.

• The spectrum scope with sub band selection is activated

during dualwatch or split frequency operation only.

u Push [F-3•MARKER] several times to select the

marker (sub readout or transmit frequency) or turn

the marker OFF.

• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.

• “ ” displays the marker at the sub readout frequency.

• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.

• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave-

form while transmitting. This can be deactivated in

scope set mode. (p. 5-4)

• The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func-

tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the

current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre-

quency changes. This can be deactivated and the wave-

form color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5)

i Push [F-4•HOLD] to freeze the current spectrum

waveform.

• “ ” appears while the function is in use.

• The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set

mode.

o Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.

NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-

form may appear. Push [F-2•ATT] several times to

activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.

Spurious signal waveforms may be displayed. They

are generated in the internal scope circuit and do

not indicate a transceiver malfunction.

HOLD

[F-3•MARKER]

[F-2•ATT]

[F-1•SPAN] [EXIT/SET]

[F-5•CENT/FIX][F-4•HOLD]

[F-6•MAIN/SUB]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

• Observed indication example

5-3

Fix mode

Displays signals within the specified frequency range.

The selected frequency band conditions can be ob-

served at a glance when using this mode.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.

e Push [F-5•CENT/FIX] to select the fix mode.

• “ ” is displayed when fix mode is selected.

r Push [F-2•ATT] several times to activate an attenu-

ator or turn the attenuator OFF.

• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.

t Push [F-6•MAIN/SUB] to select main band.

• The spectrum scope with sub band selection is activated

during dualwatch or split frequency operation only.

y Push [F-3•MARKER] several times to select the

marker (sub readout or transmit frequency) or turn

the marker OFF.

• “ ” displays the marker at the main readout frequency.

(always displayed)

• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.

• “ ” displays the marker at the sub readout frequency.

• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.

• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave-

form while transmitting. This can be deactivated in

scope set mode. (p. 5-4)

• The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func-

tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the

current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre-

quency changes. This can be deactivated and the wave-

form color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5)

u Push [F-4•HOLD] to freeze the current spectrum

waveform.

• “ ” appears while the function is in use.

• The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set

mode.

i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.

NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-

form may appear. Push [F-2•ATT] several times to

activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.

The scope bandwidth can be specified for each op-

erating frequency band independently in scope set

mode. (pgs. 5-6 to 5-8)

HOLD

[F-3•MARKER]

[F-2•ATT]

[EXIT/SET]

[F-5•CENT/FIX][F-4•HOLD]

[F-6•MAIN/SUB]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-4

Mini scope screen indication

The mini scope screen can be displayed with another

screen display, such as set mode menu, decoder

screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously.

q Set the scope mode (center or fix), marker, attenu-

ator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. 5-2, 5-3)

w Push [M.SCOPE] to toggle the mini scope indica-

tion ON and OFF.

• The S/RF meter type during mini scope indication can

be selected in display set mode (Meter Type (Wide

Screen) item). (p. 12-11)

Scope set mode

This set mode is used to set the waveform color,

sweeping speed, scope range for fix mode, etc.

q During spectrum scope display ON, push

[F-7•SET] to select scope set mode screen.

• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size between nor-

mal and wide.

w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set

item.

e Set the desired condition using the main dial.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default condition

or value.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select the set contents for some

items.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

[F-1•Y] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-2•Z][F-4•DEF]

[F-3•Ω ≈] [F-7•WIDE]

[M.SCOPE]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Turn the transmitting signal waveform indication ON

and OFF.

NOTE: The transmitting signal waveform indica-

tion is available for the center mode only.

5-5

Scope set mode (continued)

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Turn the peak level holding function ON and OFF.

Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope

indication (center mode only).

• Filter center : Shows the selected filter’s center

frequency at the center.

• Carrier Point Center

: Shows the selected operating

mode carrier point frequency at

the center.

• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.)

: In addition to the carrier point

center setting above, the actual

frequency is displayed for the

bottom of the scope.

Set the waveform color for the currently received sig-

nals.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB

scale.

Set the waveform color for the receiving signals max-

imum level.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.

• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB

scale.

Select the sweeping speed for the ±2.5 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

NOTE: The waveform may be displayed incorrect-

ly with “FAST” setting.

Select the sweeping speed for the ±5 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

NOTE: The waveform may be displayed incorrect-

ly with “FAST” setting.

Select the sweeping speed for the ±10 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Select the sweeping speed for the ±25 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

5-6

Scope set mode (continued)

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Select the sweeping speed for the ±50 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Select the sweeping speed for the ±100 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Select the sweeping speed for the ±250 kHz span

selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

with below 1.6 MHz band selection.

• Set the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 2 to 6 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 2.000 to 6.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 6 to 8 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 6.000 to 8.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

5-7

Scope set mode (continued)

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 8 to 11 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 11 to 15 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 11.000 to 15.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 15 to 20 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 20 to 22 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 20.000 to 22.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 22 to 26 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 22.000 to 26.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

5-8

Scope set mode (continued)

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 30 to 45 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 30.000 to 45.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 45 to 60 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 45.000 to 60.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

Set the scope edge frequencies for fix mode scope

when 26 to 30 MHz band is selected.

• Set the frequencies within 26.000 to 30.000 MHz

range in 1 kHz steps.

Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so

either edge frequency will be set to the differ-

ence between higher and lower frequencies

become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting

another edge frequency.

5-9

■ Preamplifier

The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver

front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Set

this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak sig-

nals.

➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp OFF,

preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

For all HF bands

High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band and

above

✔

About the “P.AMP2”

The “P.AMP 2” is a high gain receive amplifier. When

the “P.AMP 2” is used during times of strong electric

fields, distortion sometimes results. In such cases, use

the transceiver with the “P.AMP 1” or “P.AMP OFF” set-

ting.

The “P.AMP 2” is most effective when:

• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when electric

fields are weak.

• Receive sensitivity is insufficient during low gain, or

while using a narrow band antenna (such as small

loop, a Beverage antenna or a short Yagi antenna).

■ Attenuator

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distor-

tion when very strong signals are near the desired fre-

quency or when very strong electric fields, such as

from broadcasting stations, are near your location.

➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator 6 dB,

12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF.

➥ Push [ATT] for 1 sec. several times to set the atten-

uator 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB, 21 dB

or attenuator OFF.

[ATT]

[P.AMP]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

3dB

attenuation

6dB

attenuation

9dB

attenuation

12 dB

attenuation

15 dB

attenuation

18 dB

attenuation

21 dB

attenuation

5-10

■ RIT function

The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-

pensates for off-frequencies of the communicating

station.

The function shifts the receive frequency up to

±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps without moving the transmit

frequency.

q Push [RIT] to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.

• “ ” and the shifting frequency appear when the func-

tion is ON.

w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.

• Push [CLEAR] for 1 sec. to reset the RIT frequency.

• Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the RIT frequency

when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-18)

• Push [RIT] for 1 sec. to add the shift frequency to the op-

erating frequency.

RIT monitor function

When the RIT function is ON, pushing and holding

[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency

directly (RIT is temporarily cancelled).

✔

For your convenience— Calculate function

The shift frequency of the RIT function can be

added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.

➥ While displaying the RIT shift frequency, push [RIT]

for 1 sec.

[XFC]

[RIT][RIT/∂TX]

[CLEAR]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-11

■ AGC function

The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to

produce a constant audio output level even when the

received signal strength varies greatly.

The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics (time

constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM mode.

The FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as ‘FAST’

(0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot be se-

lected.

Selecting the preset value

q Select non-FM mode.

w Push [AGC] several times to select AGC fast, AGC

medium (MID) or AGC slow.

Adjusting the AGC time constant

q Select non-FM mode.

w Push [AGC VR], then rotate [AGC] control to adjust

the AGC time constant.

• [AGC VR] indicator above the switch lights green.

Setting the AGC time constant preset value

q Select the desired mode (not FM mode).

w Push [AGC] for 1 sec. to enter AGC set mode.

e Push [AGC] several times to select FAST time con-

stant.

r Rotate the main dial to set the desired time constant

for ‘AGC FAST.’

• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.

(depends on mode) or turned OFF.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.

t Push [AGC] to select medium time constant.

y Rotate the main dial to set the desired time constant

for ‘AGC MID.’

• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.

(depends on mode) or turned OFF.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.

u Push [AGC] to select slow time constant.

i Rotate the main dial to set the desired time constant

for ‘AGC SLOW.’

• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.

(depends on mode) or turned OFF.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.

o Select another mode (not FM). Repeat steps e to

i if desired.

!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the AGC set mode screen.

[AGC]

[AGC] control for main

[AGC VR] for main [AGC VR] for sub

[AGC] control for sub

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant

0.3 (FAST)

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

SSB 2.0 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

6.0 (SLOW)

0.1 (FAST)

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

CW 0.5 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

1.2 (SLOW)

RTTY

0.1 (FAST)

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

PSK

0.5 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

1.2 (SLOW)

3.0 (FAST)

0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0,

AM 5.0 (MID)

4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0

7.0 (SLOW)

FM 0.1 (FAST) Fixed

• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: sec.)

5-12

■ Twin PBT operation

In general PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically nar-

rows the IF passband width by shifting the IF fre-

quency to slightly outside of the IF filter passband to

reject interference. The IC-7800 uses DSP for the PBT

function. Moving both [TWIN PBT] controls to the same

position shifts the IF.

➥ The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre-

quency graphically.

➥ Push [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter the filter set

screen. Current passband width and shift frequency

is displayed in the filter set screen.

➥ To set the [TWIN PBT] controls to the center posi-

tions, push [PBT CLR] for 1 sec.

The variable range depends on the passband width

and mode. The edge of the variable range is half of the

passband width, and PBT is adjustable in 25 or 50 Hz

steps.

• [TWIN PBT] should normally be set to the center posi-

tions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interfer-

ence.

• When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed.

• Not available for FM mode.

• While rotating [TWIN PBT], noise may occur. This comes

from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment

malfunction.

• PBT operation example

IF center frequency Interference Desired signal

Passband

Both controls at

center position

Cutting a lower

passband

Cutting both higher and

lower passbands

Interference Interference

Desired signal

Passband

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

Shows filter width, shifting value and condition

[TWIN PBT] for main

[PBT CLEAR] for main [PBT CLEAR] for sub

[TWIN PBT] for sub

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-13

■ IF filter selection

The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for

each mode.

For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width

can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps.

A total of 41 passband widths are available.

For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within

50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32 pass-

band widths are available.

For AM mode, the passband width can be set within

200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-

band widths are available.

For FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3 pass-

band widths are available.

The filter selection is automatically memorized in

each mode.

The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-

rized in each filter.

IF filter selection

q Select the desired mode.

w Push [FILTER] several times to select the IF filter 1,

2 or 3.

• The selected passband width and filter number is dis-

played in the LCD.

Filter passband width setting

(except FM mode)

q Push [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen.

w Select any mode except FM.

• Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot be

set.

e Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired IF

filter.

r While pushing [F-1•BW], rotate the main dial to set

the desired passband width.

• In SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can

be set within the following range.

50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps

600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps

• In RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within the

following range.

50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps

600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps

• In AM mode, the passband width can be set within the

following range.

200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default value.

t Repeat steps w to r if desired.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.

The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the

passband width is changed.

This filter set screen graphically displays the PBT

shift frequencies and CW pitch operations.

[FILTER] for main [FILTER] for sub

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-14

Roofing filter selection

The IC-7800 has a 6 kHz roofing filter at the 1st IF fre-

quency. The roofing filter provides interference reduc-

tion from nearby strong signals.

q Push [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen.

w Select any mode except FM.

e Push [F-6•ROOFING] to select the desired filter

from 15 kHz (regular 1st IF filter) and 6 kHz

(roofing fil-

ter)

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.

r Push [EXIT•SET] to exit filter set screen.

DSP filter shape

The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data

and CW can be selected independently from soft and

sharp.

q Push [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen.

w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode.

e Push [F-7•SHAPE] to select the desired filter shape

from soft and sharp.

r Push [EXIT•SET] to exit filter set screen.

The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and

50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width

setting (CW only) independently as your default setting

in filter shape set mode.

Filter shape set mode

The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data

and CW can be selected independently from soft and

sharp.

q Push [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen.

w Push [F-7•SHAPE] for 1 sec. to enter filter shape set

mode.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.

r Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from

soft and sharp.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter shape set mode.

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands. The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF

bands.

The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

5-15

Filter shape set mode (continued)

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands. The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.

Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands. The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz band. The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz

band.

The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.

Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. The set filter shape is automatically used only

when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

5-16

■ Dualwatch operation

Dualwatch monitors 2 frequencies simultaneously.

The IC-7800 has 2 independent receiver circuits so

that you can use dualwatch with no compromises,

even on different bands and modes.

q Set the desired frequency and mode into the main

band.

w Push [DUALWATCH].

• “ ” appears.

• Pushing [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec., the sub band is

equalized at the same time. This quick dualwatch func-

tion can be turned OFF in set mode. (p. 12-14)

e Rotate the sub dial to set the desired frequency.

r Push [SUB] to enables the sub band access when

changing the frequency band, operating mode, etc.

in sub band.

• Push [MAIN] for the main band access.

t Rotate [AF] for sub band to adjust the sub band

audio level.

y To transmit on the sub band readout, push

[CHANGE] or [SPLIT].

NOTE:

• A beat note may be heard depending on the fre-

quency combination.

• Receiver sensitivity will be decreased when the

same frequency band and the same antenna are

selected during dualwatch.

• The RIT function can be used for the main read-

out only.

• The ∂TX function can be used for the transmit

readout (main readout when the split function

OFF; sub readout when the split function ON).

[MAIN]

[DUALWATCH][CHANGE] Sub dial[AF] for sub

[SPLIT][SUB]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

• Split frequency operation during dualwatch

5-17

■ Noise blanker

The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as

the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is not

available for FM mode.

q Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker function ON and

OFF.

• [NB] indicator above their switch lights green.

w Rotate [NB] control to adjust the noise blanker

threshold level.

When using the noise blanker, received signals may

be distorted if they are excessively strong or the

noise type is other than impulse. Turn the noise

blanker OFF, or rotate [NB] control to a shallow po-

sition in this case.

NB set mode

To deal with various type of noises, attenuation level

and noise width can be set in NB set mode.

q Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter NB set mode.

w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.

e Rotate the main dial to set the desired level or value.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit NB set mode.

[NB] for main

[NB] control for sub[NB] control for main

[NB] for sub

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.

Set the noise pulse width from 1 to 100.

5-18

■ Noise reduction

The noise reduction function reduces random noise

components and enhances desired signals which are

buried in noise. The DSP does the random noise re-

duction function.

q Push the [NR] to turn the noise reduction ON.

• [NR] indicator above their switch lights green.

w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

e Push the [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction

OFF.

• [NR] indicator lights off.

Deep rotation of the [NR] control results in audio

signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for

maximum readability.

■ Dial lock function

The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by

accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-

tion electronically locks the dial.

➥ Push [LOCK] to toggle the dial lock function ON and

OFF.

• The [LOCK] indicator lights when the dial lock function

is in use.

[LOCK] indicator for main

[LOCK] for sub[LOCK] for main

[LOCK] indicator for sub

[NR] for main

[NR] control for sub[NR] control for main

[NR] for sub

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-19

■ Notch function

This transceiver has auto and manual notch functions.

The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at-

tenuates more than 3 beat tones, tuning signals, etc.,

even if they are moving. The manual notch can be set

to attenuate a frequency via the [NOTCH] control.

The auto notch can be used in SSB, AM and FM

modes.

The manual notch can be used in SSB, CW, RTTY,

PSK and AM modes.

• Auto notch indication

➥ Push [NOTCH] to toggle the notch function between

auto, manual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.

➥ Push [NOTCH] to turn the manual notch function

ON and OFF in CW mode.

➥ Push [NOTCH] to turn the auto notch function ON

and OFF in FM mode.

• [NOTCH] indicator above their switch lights green.

• Push [NOTCH] for 1 sec. to select the notch filter width

for manual notch from wide, middle and narrow.

• Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the

[NOTCH] control.

• “ ” appears when auto notch is in use.

• “ ” appears when manual notch is in use.

While tuning the manual notch, noise may be heard.

This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate

an equipment malfunction.

■ Digital selector

The digital selector manually adjusts the center fre-

quency of the automatic pre-selector.

The automatic pre-selector adds selectivity ahead of

the 1st mixer. This reduces intermodulation distortion

from the nearby strong signals.

The automatic pre-selector tracks the frequency tun-

ing, changing it’s resonant frequency in discrete steps.

q Push [DIGI-SEL] to turn the digital selector ON and

OFF.

• [DIGI-SEL] indicator above their switch lights green.

w Rotate [DIGI-SEL] control to adjust the center fre-

quency.

NOTE:

• When rotating the main dial (or sub dial during dual-

watch or split function)

while the digital selector is ac-

tivated, mechanical noise may be heard due to the

switching noise from internal relays.

• The preamp (P.AMP1 or P.AMP2) cannot be used

while the digital selector is activated.

[DIGI-SEL] control for main

[DIGI-SEL] for sub[DIGI-SEL] for main

[DIGI-SEL] control for sub

[NOTCH] control for main

[NOTCH] for sub[NOTCH] for main

[NOTCH] control for sub

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

• Manual notch indication

6-1

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Section 6

■ VOX function …………………………………………………………… 6-2

D Using the VOX function …………………………………………… 6-2

D Adjusting the VOX function ………………………………………… 6-2

D VOX set mode ……………………………………………………… 6-2

■ Break-in function ………………………………………………………… 6-3

D Semi break-in operation …………………………………………… 6-3

D Full break-in operation ……………………………………………… 6-3

■ ∂TX function …………………………………………………………… 6-4

D ∂TX monitor function ………………………………………………… 6-4

■ Monitor function ………………………………………………………… 6-4

■ Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) ……………………………… 6-5

■ Speech compressor (SSB only) ……………………………………… 6-5

■ Split frequency operation ……………………………………………… 6-6

■ Quick split function ……………………………………………………… 6-7

D Split lock function …………………………………………………… 6-7

6-2

■ VOX function

The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function

switches between transmit and receive with your voice.

This function provides “hands-free” operation.

Using the VOX function

q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).

w Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn the VOX function ON or

OFF.

• “VOX” appears while the VOX is in use.

• [VOX/BK-IN] indicator above this switch lights green.

Adjusting the VOX function

q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).

w Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn VOX function ON.

e While speaking into the microphone with your nor-

mal voice level, rotate [VOX GAIN] to the point

where the transceiver is continuously transmitting.

r During receive, rotate [ANTI VOX] to the point

where the transceiver does not switch to transmit

due to received audio from the speaker.

t Adjust the VOX delay and the VOX voice delay in

VOX set mode, if necessary.

VOX set mode

q Push [VOX/BK-IN] for 1 sec. to enter VOX set

mode.

w Select the desired item using [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z].

e Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or con-

dition.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit VOX set mode.

[VOX/BK-IN]

[ANTI VOX][VOX GAIN]

[AM/FM][SSB]

[VOX/BK-IN]

[AM/FM][SSB]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before re-

turning to receive within 0 to 2.0 sec. range.

Set the VOX voice delay to prevent mis-transmission

of your voice when switching to transmit.

Short, Mid., Long and OFF settings are available.

When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX mon-

itor function OFF, the transmitted audio will be

echoed.

6-3

■ Break-in function

The break-in function is used in CW mode to automat-

ically toggle the transceiver between transmit and re-

ceive when keying. The IC-7800 is capable for full

break-in or semi break-in.

Semi break-in operation

During semi break-in operation, the transceiver selects

transmit when keying, then automatically returns to re-

ceive after a pre-set time after you stop keying.

q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode.

w Push [VOX/BK-IN] several times to turn the semi

break-in function ON.

• “BK IN” appears.

e Rotate [DELAY] to set the break-in delay time (the

delay from transmit to receive).

When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust

the keying speed.

Full break-in operation

During full break-in operation, the transceiver auto-

matically selects transmit while keying and returns to

receive immediately after keying is finished.

q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode.

w Push [VOX/BK-IN] several times to turn the full

break-in function ON.

• “F-BK IN” appears.

When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust

the keying speed.

[KEY SPEED] (inner control) [DELAY] (outer control)

[VOX/BK-IN] [CW]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-4

■

∂∂

TX function

The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to

±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancelling

the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive fre-

quency.

• See (3 on p. 1-11 for function description.

q Push [∂TX].

• “ ” appears.

w Rotate [RIT/∂TX].

e To reset the ∂TX frequency, push [CLEAR] for

1 sec.

• Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the RIT frequency

when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-1)

r To cancel the ∂TX function, push [∂TX] again.

• “ ” disappears.

DD ∂∂

TX monitor function

When the ∂TX function is ON, pushing and holding

[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency

directly (∂TX is temporarily cancelled).

✔ For your convenience— Calculate function

The shift frequency of the ∂TX function can be

added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.

➥ While displaying the ∂TX shift frequency, push

[∂TX] for 1 sec.

■ Monitor function

The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-

mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice

characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-

ter. (p. 12-4) The CW sidetone functions regardless of

the [MONI] switch setting.

q Push [MONI] to switch the monitor function ON and

OFF.

• [MONI] indicator above this switch lights green.

w Rotate [MONI GAIN] for the clearest audio output

while pushing [PTT] and speaking into the micro-

phone.

NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay, turn the

monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be

echoed.

[MONI GAIN][MONI]

[XFC]

[RIT/∂TX] [∂TX]

[CLEAR]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-5

■ Transmit filter width setting (SSB only)

The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be selected

from wide, middle and narrow.

➥ During USB or LSB mode selection, push [COMP]

for 1 sec. several times to select the desired trans-

mit filter width from wide, middle and narrow.

• The filter functions regardless of the speech compressor

use.

• The following filters are specified as the default. Each of

the filter width can be re-set in level set mode. (p. 12-5)

WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz

MID : 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz

NAR : 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz

■ Speech compressor (SSB only)

The speech compressor increases average RF output

power, improving signal strength and readability in

SSB mode only.

q Select USB or LSB mode and adjust [MIC] to a suit-

able level.

• Push [METER] several times to select the ALC meter for

microphone gain adjustment.

w Push [COMP] to turn the speech compressor ON.

e Push [METER] once to select the COMP meter.

r While speaking into the microphone, rotate [COMP]

control, so that the COMP meter reads within the

COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) with your normal

voice level.

When the COMP meter peaks exceed the COMP

zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted.

t Push [METER] 5 times to select the ALC meter.

y While speaking into the microphone, rotate [DRIVE],

so that the ALC meter reads within the 30 to 50%

range of the ALC zone with your normal voice level.

✔ For your convenience

Push [METER] for 1 sec. to display the multi-function

meter that can check the ALC and COMP level at a

glance.

ALC

52V

1.5

∞

100

150

200

250

SWR

COMP

60dB

COMP zone

[COMP] control [DRIVE]

[COMP][MIC] [METER]

[COMP]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-6

■ Split frequency operation

Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and

receive in the same mode on two different frequencies.

The split frequency operation is performed using 2 fre-

quencies on the main and sub readouts.

The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for

receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.

q Set 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode.

w Push [SPLIT] momentarily, then push [M=S] for

1 sec.

• The quick split function is much more convenient for se-

lecting the transmit frequency. See the next section for

details.

• The equalized transmit frequency and “ ” ap-

pear on the LCD.

• [SPLIT] indicator lights.

• “TX” appears to show the transmit frequency readout.

e Set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz in one of

following ways.

• When the split function ON ➥ Rotate the main dial while pushing [XFC].

➥ Rotate the sub dial.

• The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-

ing [XFC] or using dualwatch.

r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit

on 21.310 MHz.

To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push

[CHANGE] to exchange the main and sub readouts.

• When [XFC] is pushed

✔

CONVENIENT

• Direct shift frequency input

The shift frequency can be entered directly.

q Push [F-INP•ENT].

w Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys.

• 1 kHz to 1 MHz can be set.

• When you require a minus shift direction, push [GENE•.]

in advance.

• The split frequency operation is ready e Push [SPLIT].

• The shift frequency is input in the sub readout and the

split function is turned ON.

[Example]

To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:

- Push [F-INP•ENT], [1.8•1] then [SPLIT].

To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:

- Push [F-INP•ENT], [GENE•.], [7•3] then [SPLIT].

• Split lock function

Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main

dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this,

use both the split lock and dial lock functions to change

the transmit frequency only. The split lock function can-

cels the dial lock function while pushing [XFC] during

split frequency operation.

The dial lock’s effectiveness during split frequency op-

eration can be selected in the set mode for both re-

ceive and transmit frequencies; or only the receive fre-

quency. (p. 12-15)

Sub dialMain dial

[SPLIT][CHANGE]

[XFC]

[M=S]

[SPLIT] indicator

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-7

■ Quick split function

When you find a DX station, an important considera-

tion is how to set the split frequency.

When you push the [SPLIT] switch for 1 sec., split fre-

quency operation is turned ON, the sub readout is

equalized to the main readout frequency and enters

standby for transmit frequency input.

This shortens the time needed to start split frequency

operation.

The quick split function is ON by default. For your con-

venience, it can be turned OFF in set mode. (p. 12-15)

In this case, the [SPLIT] switch does not equalize the

main and sub readout frequencies.

q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in

VFO mode.

w Push [SPLIT] for 1 sec.

• Split frequency operation is turned ON.

• The sub readout is equalized to the main readout fre-

quency.

• “ ” indicator appears and the sub readout en-

ters standby for transmit frequency input.

e Enter the desired offset frequency from the keypad

then push [SPLIT], or set the transmit frequency with

the main dial while pushing [XFC], or with the sub

dial.

• “ ” indicator disappears when [XFC] is pushed

or the main/sub dial is rotated.

• Offset frequency setting with the keypad— example

To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:

- Push [F-INP•

ENT], [1.8•1] then [SPLIT].

To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:

- Push [F-INP•

ENT], [GENE•.], [7•3] then [SPLIT].

Split lock function

The split lock function is convenient for changing only

the transmit frequency. When the split lock function is

not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the

main dial, changes the receive frequency. The split lock

function is ON by default, but can be turned OFF in set

mode. (p. 12-15)

q While split frequency operation is ON, push [LOCK]

for both main and sub band to activate the split lock

function.

w While pushing [XFC], rotate the main dial to change

the transmit frequency.

• If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating the main

dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.

Main dial[XFC] [LOCK]

for main

[LOCK]

for sub

[LOCK] indicator for main [LOCK] indicator for sub

Main dial

[SPLIT][XFC]

[SPLIT] indicator

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

7-1

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 7

■ About digital voice recorder …………………………………………… 7-2

■ Recording a received audio …………………………………………… 7-3

D Basic recording ……………………………………………………… 7-3

D One-touch recording ………………………………………………… 7-3

■ Playing the recorded audio …………………………………………… 7-4

D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-4

D One-touch playing …………………………………………………… 7-4

■ Protect the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5

■ Erasing the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5

■ Recording a message for transmit …………………………………… 7-6

D Recording …………………………………………………………… 7-6

D Confirming a message for transmit ………………………………… 7-6

■ Programming a memory name ……………………………………… 7-7

■ Sending a recorded message ………………………………………… 7-8

D Transmit level setting ……………………………………………… 7-8

■ Voice set mode ………………………………………………………… 7-9

■ Saving a voice memory into the CF card …………………………… 7-10

D Saving the received audio memory ……………………………… 7-10

D Saving the TX memory …………………………………………… 7-10

7-2

■ About digital voice recorder

The IC-7800 has digital voice memories, up to 4 chan-

nels for transmit, and up to 20 channels for receive.

A maximum message length of 30 sec. can be

recorded into a receive channel (total message length

for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total message

length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded in transmit

channels.

The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated

CQ and number transmissions in contests, as well as

when making consecutive calls during DX’peditions.

q Select any mode.

w Push [F-2•VOICE] to display voice recorder screen.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to display voice recorder menu.

r Push [F-1•PLAY] or [F-2•MIC REC] to select the de-

sired memory channel screen, then record audio or

playback the contents as described below.

t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit voice recorder screen.

• Example— When [REC] is pushed for 1sec.

• Example— When [REC] is pushed momentarily

• Playing back the all contents in a channel • Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel

Push for 1 sec.

(starts recording)

Push for 1 sec.

(starts recording)

Or, push for 1 sec.

Push momentarily

(stops recording)

Push momentarily

(starts recording)

Push momentarily

(starts recording)

Push momentarily.

Push momentarily

(stops recording)

20 sec.

15 sec.

(default)

30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)

3 sec.

30 sec.

Push [REC] momentarily within 30 sec.

after pushing [REC] for 1 sec., records

the all contents.

Push [REC] momentarily

records the contents of

the previous 15 sec.*

When [REC] is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*

from the last [REC] operation, all the contents between

[REC] operations will be recorded.

Push [REC] momentarily after passing

30 sec. from pushing [REC] for 1 sec.,

records the 30 sec. before canceling

the record.

These contents

won’t be recorded.

*The recording time period can be changed with “Normal Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 7-9).

*The playing back time period can be changed with

“Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 7-9).

NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory

channels automatically.

[EXIT/SET][REC] [PLAY][F-2][F-1]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

7-3

■ Recording a received audio

Up to 20 channels of receive voice memories are

available in the IC-7800. And the total audio length of

up to 209 sec. can be recorded in receive channels.

However, the maximum recordable length into a single

channel is 30 sec.

This voice recorder records not only the received

audio, but also the information such as set operating

frequency, mode, and the recording time for your fu-

ture reference.

Basic recording

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select the desired mode.

e Push [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder

screen.

• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-

played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears,

push [F-7•T/R] to select RX memory channel.

r Push [REC] for 1 sec. to start recording.

• The operating frequency, mode and current time are pro-

grammed as the memory names automatically.

t Push [REC] momentarily to stop recording.

IMPORTANT!

Push [REC] to stop recording before, or when

30 sec. has passed from the start of recording.

The voice recorder memory records the 30 sec.

(max.) of audio before [REC] is pushed.

For example, when recording 40 sec. of audio,

the first 10 sec. audio will be over-recorded with

the last 10 sec., so that the total of audio recorded

is 30 sec. only.

When you record the 21st audio segment, or

when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec., the

oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to

make room for the new audio.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) while

recording, no audio will be recorded.

One-touch recording

To record the receiving signal contents immediately,

one-touch voice recording is available.

➥ Push [REC] momentarily to records the previous

15 sec. audio.

• The recordable time period can be set in voice set mode.

(p. 7-9)

[REC]

[EXIT/SET] [F-7•T/R][REC][F-2•VOICE]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

7-4

■ Playing the recorded audio

Basic playing

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder

screen.

• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-

played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears,

push [F-7•T/R] to select RX memory channel.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice

memory to playback.

r Push [F-3•PLAY] to start playback.

• “ ” indicators appear and the timer counts down.

t Push [F-3•PLAY] again to stop playback if desired.

• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the

recorded contents in the channel are played, or after

30 sec.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

One-touch playing

The previously recorded audio in channel 1 can be

playback without selecting voice recorder screen.

➥ Push [PLAY] momentarily to playback the last 5 sec.

of the previously recorded audio.

• “ ” indicator appears.

• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the

recorded contents in the channel are played, or after

5 sec.

• The playback time period can be set in voice set mode.

(p. 7-9)

[PLAY]

Appear Counts down

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•PLAY]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

7-5

■ Protect the recorded contents

The protect function is available to protect the recorded

contents from accidental erasing, such as over-record,

etc.

q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.

w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice

memory.

e Push [F-4•PROTECT] to turn the protect function

ON and OFF.

• “ ” indicator appears when the contents is protected.

r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

■ Erasing the recorded contents

The recorded contents can be erased independently

by channel.

q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.

w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice

memory to be erased.

e Push [F-5•CLR] for 1 sec. to erase the contents.

• Push [F-4•PROTECT] to release the protection in ad-

vance if necessary.

r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z][F-5•CLR]

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•PROTECT]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

7-6

■ Recording a message for transmit

To transmit a message using the voice recorder, record

the desired message in advance as described below.

The IC-7800 has digital voice memories for transmis-

sion, up to 4 channels and the total message length of

up to 99 sec. can be recorded.

Recording

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder

screen.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu.

r Push [F-2•MIC REC] to select the voice mic. record

screen.

t Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired mem-

ory channel.

y Push [F-4•REC] for 1 sec. to start recording.

• “ ” indicator appears.

• Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT].

• Previously recorded contents are cleared.

• Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically

muted.

u While speaking into the microphone with your nor-

mal voice level, adjust the [MIC] control so that the

[MIC-REC LEVEL] indicator reads within 100%.

i Push [F-4•REC] momentarily to stop recording.

• The recording is terminated automatically when the re-

maining time becomes 0 sec.

o Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

Confirming a message for transmit

q Perform the steps q to r as “D Recording” above.

w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired mem-

ory channel.

e Push [F-3•PLAY] to playback the recorded contents.

• “ ” indicator appears.

r Push [F-3•PLAY] again to stop playback.

• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the

recorded contents in the channel are played.

t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•PLAY]

Appears Adjust [MIC] control so that this

indicator reads within 100%.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•REC]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

7-7

■ Programming a memory name

Memory channels can be tagged with alphanumeric

names of up to 20 characters each.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _

and spaces can be used. (See the table below.)

q Record a message as described in page 7-6.

w During the voice mic. record screen indication, push

[F-5•NAME] to enter memory name edit condition.

• A cursor appears and blinks.

e Push [F-7•T1..T4] several times to select the desired

voice memory.

r Input the desired character by rotating the main dial

or by pushing the band key for number input.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols.

• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.

• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.

• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.

• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter

numerals.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.

• The cursor disappears.

y Repeat steps e to t to program another voice

memory’s name, if desired.

u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.

• Voice memory name editing example

• Usable characters

[F-1•Ω] [F-2•≈] [F-4•SPACE] [F-7•T1..T4]

[F-3•DEL] Keypad[ABC]/[abc] [123]/[Symbol]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Key selection Editable characters

A to Z (capital letters)

a to z (small letters)

0 to 9 (numbers)

! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; =

< > ( ) [ ] { } | _

7-8

■ Sending a recorded message

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select a phone mode by pushing [SSB] or [AM/FM].

e Push [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder

screen.

• If the receive voice memory channel appears, push

[F-7•T/R] to select TX memory channel (T1–T4).

r Push the desired memory channel switch, [F-1•T1]

to [F-4•T4], momentarily to transmit the contents.

• The transceiver transmits automatically.

• “ ” indicator appears and the memory timer

counts down.

• You hear the transmitted message from the speaker as

the default. This can be turned OFF in voice set mode.

(p. 7-9)

t Push the selected memory channel switch, [F-1•T1]

to [F-4•T4], again to stop, if desired.

• The transceiver returns to receive automatically when all

of the recorded contents in the channel are transmitted.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice memory

screen.

✔

For your information

When an external keypad is connected to [EXT KEY-

PAD], the recorded message, T1–T4, can be transmit-

ted without opening the voice recorder screen.

See page 2-6 for details.

Transmit level setting

q Call up the voice recorder screen as described as

above.

w Push [F-6•TX LEV.] to select the voice memory

transmit level set condition.

e Push the desired memory channel switch, [F-1•T1]

to [F-4•T4], momentarily to transmit the contents.

• The transceiver transmits automatically.

• “ ” indicator appears and the memory timer

counts down.

r Rotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice

level.

• Push [F-7•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default condition.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the voice recorder

screen.

[F-6•TX LEV.] [EXIT/SET] Main dial

[F-7•T/R]

Appears

[F-1•T1] [F-2•T2] [F-3•T3] [F-4•T4] [EXIT/SET] [F-7•T/R]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

7-9

■ Voice set mode

Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and

normal recording times for voice recorder.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder

screen.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu.

r Push [F-7•SET] to select voice set mode screen.

t Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.

y Rotate main dial to set the desired condition or

value.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default condition

or value.

u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice set mode screen.

[F-2•Z][F-1•Y]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial[F-4•DEF]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Turn the automatic monitor function for recorded

audio contents transmission.

• ON : Monitors transmitting audio automatically

when sending a recorded audio.

• OFF : Monitors transmitting audio only when the

monitor function is in use.

Set the desired time period for the one-touch playing

(when [PLAY] is pushed momentarily).

• 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.

(default: 5 sec.)

Set the desired time period for the for one-touch

recording (when [REC] is pushed momentarily).

• 5 to 15 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.

(default: 15 sec.)

7-10

■ Saving a voice memory into the CF memory card

Saving the received audio memory

The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into

the CF (Compact Flash) memory card.

q During voice recorder RX memory screen display,

push [F-6•SAVE] to select voice file save screen.

• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-

played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears,

push [F-7•T/R] to select RX memory channel.

w Change the following conditions if desired.

• File name:

z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-

dition.

• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the

file name, if necessary.

x Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to

select the character.

• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (nu-

merals); [Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _

@ can be selected.

• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]

to move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete

a character and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a

space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

• Saving location

z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view

screen.

x Select the desired directory or folder in the CF

memory card.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] to select the upper directory.

• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the

same directory.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] for 1 sec. to select a folder in the

directory.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete the

folder.

• Push [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a new

folder. (Edit the name with the same manner as

the “• File name” above.)

c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file

name.

e Push [F-6•SAVE].

• After the saving is completed, return to voice recorder

RX memory screen automatically.

Saving the TX memory

The TX memory contents can also be saved into the

CF (Compact Flash) memory card. However, the con-

tents are saved with the memory channel list, set mode

conditions, etc. at the same time.

See page 12-25 for details.

[F-1•DIR/FILE] Main dial[EXIT/SET][F-4•EDIT]

[F-6•SAVE] [F-7•WIDE]

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

• Voice recorder RX memory screen

• Voice file save screen— file name edit

• While saving

8-1

MEMORY OPERATION Section 8

■ Memory channels ……………………………………………………… 8-2

■ Memory channel selection …………………………………………… 8-2

D Using the [Y]/[Z] keys ……………………………………………… 8-2

D Using the keypad …………………………………………………… 8-2

■ Memory list screen ……………………………………………………… 8-3

D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen …… 8-3

D Confirming programmed memory channels ……………………… 8-3

■ Memory channel programming ……………………………………… 8-4

D Programming in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-4

D Programming in memory mode …………………………………… 8-4

■ Frequency transferring ………………………………………………… 8-5

D Transferring in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-5

D Transferring in memory mode ……………………………………… 8-5

■ Memory names ………………………………………………………… 8-6

D Editing (programming) memory names …………………………… 8-6

■ Memory clearing ………………………………………………………… 8-6

■ Memo pads ……………………………………………………………… 8-7

D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads …… 8-7

D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad ………………………… 8-7

8-2

■ Memory channels

The transceiver has 101 memory channels. Memory

mode is very useful for quickly changing to often-used

frequencies.

All 101 memory channels are tunable which means the

programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily with

the main dial, etc. in memory mode.

■ Memory channel selection

Using the [

]/[

] keys

q Push [V/M] to select memory mode.

w Push [Y]/[Z] several times to select the desired

memory channel.

• Push and hold [Y]/[Z] for continuous selection.

• [UP] and [DN] on the microphone can also be used.

e To return to VFO mode, push [V/M] again.

Using the keypad

q Push [V/M] to select memory mode.

w Push [F-INP•ENT

e Push the desired memory channel number using the

keypad.

• Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2,

respectively.

r Push [Y] or [Z] to select the desired memory chan-

nel.

[EXAMPLE]

To select the memory channel 3;

- Push [F-INP•ENT], [7•3], then push [Y] or [Z].

To select the memory channel 12;

- Push [F-INP•ENT], [1.8•1], [3.5•2], then push [Y] or

[Z].

To select the scan edge channel P1;

- Push [F-INP•

ENT], [1.8•1], [50•0], [50•0], then push

[Y] or [Z].

To select the scan edge channel P2;

- Push [F-INP•

ENT], [1.8•1], [50•0], [1.8•1], then push

[Y] or [Z].

[Y] [Z] [V/M]

Keypad

[F-INP•ENT]

[Y] [Z] [V/M]

MEMORY OPERATION

MEMORY

TRANSFER

OVER-

CHANNEL

CHANNEL CAPABILITY

TO VFO WRITING

CLEAR

NUMBER

Regular memory

1–99

One frequency and one mode

Yes Yes Yes

channels in each memory channel.

Scan edge

One frequency and one mode in

memory P1, P2 each memory channel as scan Yes Yes No

channels edges for programmed scan.

8-3

■ Memory list screen

The memory list screen simultaneously shows 9 mem-

ory channels and their programmed contents. 15 mem-

ory channels can be displayed in the wide memory list

screen.

You can select a desired memory channel from mem-

ory list screen.

Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.

• [F-7•WIDE] switches the standard and wide screens.

e While pushing [F-1•ROLL], rotate the main dial to

select the desired memory channel.

•[Y] and [Z] can also be used.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

• Memory list screen

Confirming programmed memory channels

q Select memory list screen as described above.

w While pushing [F-1•ROLL], rotate the main dial to

scroll the screen.

e Push [F-2•SET] to select the highlighted memory

channel, if desired.

•“≈” appears beside the selected memory channel num-

ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory

channel contents are displayed below the frequency

readout.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

Main dial[F-1•ROLL] [F-2•SET] [EXIT/SET]

[Y][Z]

Main dial[F-1•ROLL]

[F-4•MEMORY]

[EXIT/SET][F-7•WIDE]

MEMORY OPERATION

8-4

■ Memory channel programming

Memory channel programming can be preformed ei-

ther in VFO mode or in memory mode.

Programming in VFO mode

q Set the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-

ter width in VFO mode.

w Push [Y]/[Z] several times to select the desired

memory channel.

• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-

sired channel.

• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-

nel readout (below the frequency readout).

• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel (and does not have contents).

e Push [MW] for 1 sec. to program the displayed fre-

quency, operating mode, etc., into the memory

channel.

Programming in memory mode

q Select the desired memory channel with [Y]/[Z] in

memory mode.

• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-

nel readout (below the frequency readout).

• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel (and does not have contents).

w Set the desired frequency and operating mode in

memory mode.

• To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry

with the keypad or memo pads, etc.

e Push [MW] for 1 sec. to program the displayed fre-

quency and operating mode into the memory chan-

nel.

[Y] [Z] [MW]

MEMORY OPERATION

Push for 1 sec.

Beep

[EXAMPLE]: Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory

channel 12.

or then

Push for 1 sec.

Beep

[EXAMPLE]: Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory

channel 18.

8-5

■ Frequency transferring

The frequency and operating mode in a memory chan-

nel can be transferred to the VFO.

Frequency transferring can be performed in either VFO

mode or memory mode.

Transferring in VFO mode

This is useful for transferring programmed contents to

VFO.

q Select VFO mode with [V/M].

w Select the memory channel to be transferred with

[Y]/[Z].

• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-

sired channel.

• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-

nel readout (below the frequency readout).

• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel. In this case transferring is impossible.

e Push [V/M] for 1 sec. to transfer the frequency and

operating mode.

• Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on

the frequency readout.

Transferring in memory mode

This is useful for transferring frequency and operating

mode while operating in memory mode.

When you have changed the frequency or operat-

ing mode in the selected memory channel:

• Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are

transferred.

• Programmed frequency and mode in the memory

channel are not transferred, and they remain in the

memory channel.

q Select the memory channel to be transferred with

[Y]/[Z] in memory mode.

• And, set the frequency or operating mode if required.

w Push [V/M] for 1 sec. to transfer the frequency and

operating mode.

• Displayed frequency and operating mode are transferred

to the VFO.

e To return to VFO mode, push [V/M] momentarily.

MEMORY OPERATION

TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE

Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)

Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW

TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE

Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (M-ch 16)

Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW

Push for 1 sec.

Beep

Push for 1 sec.

Beep

Programmed contents appear.

8-6

■ Memory names

All memory channels (including scan edges) can be

tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-

ters each.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _

and spaces can be used.

Editing (programming) memory names

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.

e Select the desired memory channel.

r Push [F-4•NAME] to edit memory channel name.

• A cursor appears and blinks.

• Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be

edited.

t Input the desired character by rotating the main dial

or by pushing the band key for number input.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols.

• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.

• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.

• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.

• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter

numerals.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.

• The cursor disappears.

u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory

channel’s name, if desired.

i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

■ Memory clearing

Any unnecessary memory channels can be cleared.

The cleared memory channels become blank chan-

nels.

q Select memory mode with [V/M].

w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.

e Select the desired memory channel with [Y]/[Z].

r Push [F-5•CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the contents.

• The programmed frequency and operating mode disap-

pear.

t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e

and r.

Push for 1 sec.

Beep

(CLR)

[F-5•CLR]

[F-1•Ω] [F-2•≈] [F-4•SPACE]

[F-3•DEL] Keypad[ABC]/[abc] [123]/[Symbol]

MEMORY OPERATION

8-7

■ Memo pads

The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre-

quency and operating mode for easy write and recall.

The memo pads are separate from memory channels.

The default number of memo pads is 5, however, this

can be increased to 10 in set mode if desired. (p. 12-

16)

Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-

rize a frequency and operating mode temporarily, such

as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or when a

desired station is busy for a long time and you want to

temporarily search for other stations.

Use the transceiver’s memo pads instead of relying on

hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.

Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads

You can simply write the accessed readout frequency

and operating mode by pushing [MP-W].

When you write a 6th frequency and operating mode,

the oldest written frequency and operating mode are

automatically erased to make room for the new set-

tings.

Each memo pad must have its own unique combi-

nation of frequency and operating mode; memo

pads having identical settings cannot be written.

Calling up a frequency from a memo pad

You can simply call up the desired frequency and op-

erating mode of a memo pad by pushing [MP-R] sev-

eral times.

• Both VFO and memory modes can be used.

• The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting

from the most recently written.

When you call up a frequency and an operating mode

from memo pads with [MP-R], the previously displayed

frequency and operating mode are automatically

stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and operat-

ing mode in the temporary pad can be recalled by

pushing [MP-R] several times.

• You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different

frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the temporary

pad) are called up by [MP-R].

If you change the frequency or operating mode

called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc.,

the frequency and operating mode in the temporary

pad are erased.

Newest

MEMO PADS

Oldest

Newest

Erased

Oldest

In this example, 21.276 MHz (LSB) will be erased

when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written.

[MP-R][MP-W]

MEMORY OPERATION

9-1

SCANS Section 9

■ Scan types ……………………………………………………………… 9-2

■ Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 9-2

■ Voice squelch control function ………………………………………… 9-3

■ Scan set mode ………………………………………………………… 9-3

■ Programmed scan operation ………………………………………… 9-4

■ ∂F scan operation ……………………………………………………… 9-4

■ Fine programmed scan/∂F scan ……………………………………… 9-5

■ Memory scan operation ………………………………………………… 9-6

■ Select memory scan operation ……………………………………… 9-6

■ Setting select memory channels ……………………………………… 9-7

D Setting in scan screen ……………………………………………… 9-7

D Setting in memory list screen ……………………………………… 9-7

D Erasing the select scan setting …………………………………… 9-7

■ Tone scan ……………………………………………………………… 9-8

9-2

■ Scan types

• The scan function can be used on the main read-

out only.

• You can operate a scan while operating on a fre-

quency using the dualwatch or split functions.

PROGRAMMED SCAN

Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies

(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2).

This scan operates in VFO mode.

SELECT MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.

∂F SCAN

Repeatedly scans within ∂F span area.

This scan operates in memory mode.This scan operates in memory mode.

This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.

Scan

Scan edge

P1 or P2

Scan edge

P2 or P1

Jump

MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.

Mch 1

★1

Mch 5

★1

Mch 2

★2

Mch 3

★1

Mch 4

Mch 6

★3

Mch 7

★1

Mch 99

★1

Mch 1

★1

Mch 5

★1

Mch 2

★2

Mch 3

★1

Mch 4

Mch 6

★3

Mch 7

★1

Mch 99

★1

Blank channel Blank channel

ScanScan

–

∂F frequency +∂F frequency

Start frequency

Jump

*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel

is specified as the select memory.

*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel

is specified as the select memory.

SCANS

■ Preparation

• Channels

For programmed scan:

Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem-

ory channels P1 and P2.

For

∂

F scan:

Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the scan screen.

For memory scan:

Program 2 or more memory channels except scan

edge memory channels.

For select memory scan:

Designate 2 or more memory channels as select mem-

ory channels. To designate the channel as a select

memory channel, choose a memory channel, then

push [F-3•SELECT] in the scan screen (memory

mode) or in the memory list screen.

• Scan resume ON/OFF

You can select the scan to resume or cancel when de-

tecting a signal, in set mode. Scan resume ON/OFF

must be set before operating a scan. See p. 9-3 for

ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition details.

• Scan speed

Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or low,

in scan set mode. See p. 9-3 for details.

• Squelch condition

SQUELCH

CLOSED

SQUELCH

OPEN

Scan stops when detecting a signal.

If you set scan resume ON in set mode, the

scan pauses for 10 sec. when detecting a

signal, then resumes. When a signal disap-

pears while scan is paused, scan resumes

2 sec. later.

The scan continues

until it is stopped

manually, and does

not pause even if it

detects signals.

Scan pauses on

each channel when

the scan resume is

ON; not applicable

when OFF.

SCAN

PROGRAMMED

STARTS

SCAN

MEMORY SCAN

WITH

9-3

■ Voice squelch control function

This function is useful when you don’t want unmodu-

lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the

voice squelch control function is activated, the receiver

checks received signals for voice components.

If a receiver signal includes voice components, and the

tone of the voice components changes within 1 sec.,

scan pauses (or stops). If the received signal includes

no voice components or the tone of the voice compo-

nents does not change within 1 sec., scan resumes.

➥ While a phone mode (SSB, AM or FM) is selected,

push [VSC] to switch the VSC (Voice Squelch Con-

trol) function ON and OFF.

• “VSC” appears when the function is activated.

• The VSC function activates for any scan.

• The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu-

lated signals, regardless of whether the scan re-

sume condition is set to ON or OFF.

■ Scan set mode

When the squelch is open, scan continues until it is

stopped manually— it does not pause on detected sig-

nals. When squelch is closed, scan stops when de-

tecting a signal, then resumes according to the scan

resume condition. Scan speed and the scan resume

condition can be set using the scan set mode.

q Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan screen.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select scan set mode.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.

r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default setting.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu.

[F-2•Z][F-1•Y]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial[F-4•DEF]

[VSC]

SCANS

Select the desired scan speed from high and low. • HIGH : scan is faster

• LOW : scan is slower

Set the scan resume function ON and OFF. • ON : When detecting a signal, scan pauses for

10 sec., then resumes. When a signal disap-

pears, scan resumes 2 sec. later.

• OFF : When detecting a signal, cancels scanning.

9-4

■ Programmed scan operation

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select VFO mode.

e Select the desired operating mode.

• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-

ning.

r Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.

t Set the main band’s [SQL] open or closed.

• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.

y Push [F-1•PROG] to start the programmed scan.

• “ ” and decimal points blink while

scanning.

u When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-

ting and the squelch condition.

i To cancel the scan, push [F-1•PROG].

• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.

o Push [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the fre-

quency that is set before starting the scan, if de-

sired.

If the same frequencies are programmed into the

scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-

grammed scan does not start.

■

∂∂

F scan operation

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select VFO mode or a memory channel.

e Select the desired operating mode.

• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-

ning.

r Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.

t Set the main band’s [SQL] open or closed.

• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.

y Set the ∂F span by pushing [F-4•∂F SPAN].

• ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz,

±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.

u Set center frequency of the ∂F span.

i Push [F-2•∂F] to start the ∂F scan.

• “ ” and decimal points blink while scanning.

o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-

ting and the squelch condition.

!0 To cancel the scan, push [F-2•∂F].

• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.

!1 Push [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the fre-

quency that is set before starting the scan, if de-

sired.

[SQL] for main [F-2•∂F]

[F-4•∂F SPAN]

[EXIT/SET]

Main dial

[SQL] for main [F-1•PROG] [EXIT/SET] Main dial

SCANS

9-5

■ Fine programmed scan/fine ∂F scan

In fine scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed de-

creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver

keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step shifts from

50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.

e Set for programmed scan or ∂F scan as described

on previous page.

r Push [F-1•PROG] or [F-2•∂F] to start a scan.

• “ ” or “ ” and decimal points

blink while scanning.

t Push [F-3•FINE] to start a fine scan.

• “ ” or “ ” blinks

instead of “ ” or “ ,” respec-

tively.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed de-

creases but scan does not stop.

u Push [F-1•PROG] or [F-2•∂F] to stop the scan; push

[F-3•FINE] to cancel the fine scan.

• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.

i Push [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the fre-

quency that is set before starting the scan, if de-

sired.

[F-2•∂F][F-1•PROG] [F-3•FINE] [EXIT/SET]

SCANS

9-6

■ Memory scan operation

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select memory mode.

e Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.

r Set the main band’s [SQL] open or closed.

• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.

t Push [F-1•MEMO] to start the memory scan.

• “ ” and decimal points blink while scan-

ning.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-

ting and the squelch condition.

u To cancel the scan, push [F-1•MEMO].

• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.

2 or more memory channels must be programmed

for memory scan to start.

■ Select memory scan operation

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select memory mode.

e Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.

r Set the main band’s [SQL] open or closed.

• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.

t Push [F-5•SEL No.] several times to select the se-

lect scan number from ★1, ★2, ★3 and ★1/★2/★3.

y Push [F-1•MEMO] to start the memory scan.

• “ ” and decimal points blink while scan-

ning.

u Push [F-3•SELECT] to start select memory scan;

push [F-3•SELECT] again to return to memory scan,

if desired.

• “ ” blinks instead of

“ ” during select memory scan.

i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-

ting and the squelch condition.

o To cancel the scan, push [F-1•MEMO].

• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.

2 or more memory channels must be designated as

select memory channels, as well as the same select

scan number, for select memory scan to start.

[SQL] for main [F-1•MEMO]

[F-3•SELECT]

[F-5•SEL No.]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial

[SQL] for main [F-1•MEMO] [EXIT/SET] Main dial

SCANS

9-7

■ Setting select memory channels

Setting in scan screen

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Select memory mode.

e Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.

r Select the desired memory channel to set as a se-

lect memory channel.

•[Y]/[Z] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.

t Push [F-3•SELECT] several times to set the mem-

ory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3 or not.

y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory

channel as a select memory channel, if desired.

u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scan screen.

Setting in memory list screen

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.

e Rotate the main dial while pushing [F-1•ROLL] or

[F-2•SET] to select the desired memory channel.

•[Y]/[Z] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.

r Push [F-3•SELECT] several times to set the mem-

ory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3 or not.

t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory

channel as a select memory channel, if desired.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.

Erasing the select scan setting

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen,

or push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan screen.

e Push [F-3•SELECT] for 1 sec. to display memory

select all clear window.

r Push one of the following keys to clear all select

scan setting.

[F-1•★1] : Clears all ★1 setting.

[F-2•★2] : Clears all ★2 setting.

[F-3•★3] : Clears all ★3 setting.

[F-4•★1,2,3] : Clears all select setting.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.

SCANS

9-8

■ Tone scan

The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a re-

ceived signal. By monitoring a signal that is being

transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can de-

termine the tone frequency required to access the re-

peater.

q Set the desired frequency or memory channel to be

checked for a tone frequency.

w Push [AM/FM] several times to select FM mode.

e Push [TONE] for 1 sec. to enter tone frequency

screen.

r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to check the repeater tone

frequency or tone squelch frequency, respectively.

t Push [F-6•T-SCAN] to start the tone scan.

• “SCAN” blinks while scanning.

y When the tone frequency is detected, the tone scan

pauses.

• The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory

channel. Program into the memory channel to store the

tone frequency permanently.

• The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater

tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.

u To stop the scan, push [F-6•T-SCAN].

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default frequency.

i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit tone frequency screen.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z]

[TONE]

[F-6•T-SCAN][F-4•DEF]

[EXIT/SET]

SCANS

10-1

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Section 10

■ Antenna connection and selection ………………………………… 10-2

■ Antenna memory settings …………………………………………… 10-3

D Antenna type selection …………………………………………… 10-3

D Temporary memory ………………………………………………… 10-4

D Antenna selection mode …………………………………………… 10-4

■ Antenna tuner operation ……………………………………………… 10-5

D Tuner operation …………………………………………………… 10-5

D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna …………………………… 10-6

10-2

■ Antenna connection and selection

The IC-7800 has 4 antenna connectors for the

HF/50 MHz bands, [ANT1], [ANT2], [ANT3], and

[ANT4].

For each operating band the IC-7800 covers, there is a

band memory which can memorize a selected an-

tenna. When you change the operating frequency be-

yond a band, the previously used antenna is automat-

ically selected (see below) for the new band. This

function allows automatic switching of 4 separate an-

tennas for HF and 50 MHz bands operation.

• Antenna selection mode: “Auto”

After an antenna has been selected for use (by push-

ing [ANT]), the antenna is automatically selected

whenever that band is used.

[EXAMPLE]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to

[ANT1], a 21/28 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT2],

a 50 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT3]. When the

antenna selector function is set to “Auto,” an antenna

is automatically selected when changing bands.

[ANT4] can be used for receive only.

• Antenna selection mode: “Manual”

When “Manual” is selected, you can use the all an-

tenna connectors, [ANT1] [ANT2], [ANT3] and [ANT4],

however, band memory does not function. In this case

you must select an antenna manually.

• Antenna selection mode: “OFF”

In this case, only [ANT1] antenna connector can be

used. [ANT] switch does not function.

[ANT]

ANT 1

ANT 2

ANT 3

ANT 4

3.5/7 MHz

bands

21/28 MHz

bands

50 MHz

bands

only

[ANT]

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

10-3

■ Antenna memory settings

This function stores the antenna connector number for

each frequency band.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [ANT] for 1 sec. to select antenna set screen.

e Select the desired frequency band with a band key.

r Push [ANT] several times to select the desired an-

tenna number that you want to set for the selected

frequency band.

•“★” appears.

t Push [F-2•ANT MW] for 1 sec. to store the antenna

selection into the antenna memory.

•“★” disappears.

y Repeat the steps e to t to store the antenna se-

lection for another frequency bands, if desired.

u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit antenna set screen.

Antenna type selection

When no antenna is connected to [ANT2], [ANT3],

and/or [ANT4], these antenna connectors can be de-

activated— deleting the antenna number from selec-

tion. This prevent the transceiver from accidentally

transmitting into an empty antenna connector.

In addition, a receive-only antenna can be specified for

[ANT4].

q Select the antenna set screen as described above.

w Push [F-7•ANT TYPE] to select antenna type set

screen.

e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired an-

tenna.

r Rotate the main dial to select the desired antenna

condition from TX/RX, RX (ANT4 only) and OFF.

• TX/RX : Select when an antenna is connected.

• OFF : Select when no antenna is connected.

• RX : Select when a receive only antenna is

connected. (available for the [ANT4] only)

t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit antenna type set screen.

✔

For your information

The “OFF” antennas cannot be selected with [ANT]

switch operation, or with the antenna memory setting.

When “RX” is selected for [ANT4], “1/R,” “2/R” and

“3/R” selections will be added for the selection for both

[ANT] switch operation and the antenna memory set-

ting. In these selections, using the antenna connected

to [ANT1], [ANT2] and/or [ANT3] for transmission and

using the antenna connected to [ANT4] for reception.

[ANT]

[F-2•ANT MW]

Band keys

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

10-4

■ Antenna memory settings (continued)

Temporary memory

The antenna temporary memory memorizes the man-

ually selected antenna. The selected antenna will be

re-called even if frequency band has been changed.

q Select the antenna set screen.

w Push [F-4•TEMP-M] to turn the temporary memory

ON and OFF.

e Select the desired frequency band with a band key.

r Push [ANT] to select the desired antenna.

•“★” appears when a different antenna from the original is

selected.

t Push [F-1•ANT MR] to re-call the original antenna.

•“★” disappears.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit antenna set screen.

CAUTION!: Before transmitting with the manually

selected antenna, make sure the selected antenna

suits the operating frequency. Otherwise the trans-

ceiver may be damaged.

Antenna selection mode

The automatic antenna selection (antenna memory)

and the [ANT] switch function can be deactivated if de-

sired.

q Select the antenna set screen.

w Push [F-6•[ANT] SW] to select the antenna selec-

tion from Auto, OFF and Manual.

• Auto : Use the antenna memory. Antenna se-

lection with [ANT] switch is also avail-

able.

• OFF : Only the antenna connected to [ANT1]

can be used. [ANT] switch is deacti-

vated.

• Manual : Deactivate the antenna memory func-

tion. Antenna can be selected with

[ANT] switch operation only.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to exit antenna set screen.

Push [F-6•[ANT] SW] to select the

antenna selection mode.

“★” appears when a different antenna

from the original is selected.

Push [F-4•TEMP-M] to turn the

temporary memory ON and OFF.

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

10-5

■ Antenna tuner operation

The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the

transceiver to the connected antenna automatically.

After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable ca-

pacitor angles are memorized as a preset point for

each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore,

when you change the frequency range, the variable ca-

pacitors are automatically preset to the memorized

point.

CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when

no antenna is connected. This will damage the

transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.

Tuner operation

➥ Push [TUNER] to turn the internal antenna tuner

ON. The antenna is tuned automatically when the

antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.

• When the tuner is ON, [TUNER] switch indicator lights

green.

• While tuning, [TUNER] switch indicator blinks green.

• MANUAL TUNING

During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal

tuner may not be tuned correctly. In such cases, man-

ual tuning is helpful.

➥ Push [TUNER] for 1 sec., to start manual tuning.

• A side tone is emitted and [TUNER] switch indicator

blinks red while tuning.

• If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1

after 20 sec. of tuning, the [TUNER] switch indicator

goes out.

• AUTOMATIC TUNER START (HF bands only)

If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions of

VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start function

and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates the

tuner automatically when the SWR exceeds 1.5:1.

This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 12-15).

NOTES:

• NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-

nected to antenna port in use.

• When 2 or more antennas are connected, select

the antenna to be used with [ANT].

• If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tuning

above 100 kHz on an antenna’s preset point, push

[TUNER] for 1 sec. to start manual tuning.

• The internal tuner may not be able to tune in AM

mode. In such cases, push [TUNER] for 1 sec. to

manually tune.

[TUNER]

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

10-6

■ Antenna tuner operation (continued)

• PTT TUNER START

The tuner is always tuned when the PTT is pushed

after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from

last-tuned frequency). This function removes the “push

and hold [TUNER]” operation and activates for the first

transmission on a new frequency.

This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 12-15).

• Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1

When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-

PW1’s tuner, tune with the external antenna tuner, and

turn OFF the IC-7800’s tuner. After tuning is com-

pleted, turn the internal tuner ON. Otherwise, both

tuners tune simultaneously and correct tuning may not

be obtained.

See the instruction manual included with each antenna

tuner for their respective operations.

If the tuner cannot tune the antenna

Check the following and try again:

• the [ANT] connector selection.

• the antenna connection and feedline.

• the untuned antenna SWR.

(Less than 3:1 for HF bands; Less

than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band)

• the transmit power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for 50 MHz band)

• the power source voltage/capacity.

If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1

after checking the above, perform the following:

• repeat manual tuning several times.

• tune with a 50 Ω dummy load and re-tune the antenna.

• turn power OFF and ON.

• adjust the antenna feedline length.

(This is effective for higher frequencies in some cases.)

• Some antennas, especially for low bands, have a narrow

bandwidth. These antennas may not be tuned at the edge

of their bandwidth, therefore, tune such an antenna as fol-

lows:

[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which has an

SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1

at 3.8 MHz.

q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner ON.

w Select CW mode.

e Turn OFF the break-in function. (p. 6-3)

r Push [TRANSMIT] to set to the transmit condition.

t Set 3.55 MHz and key down.

y Set 3.80 MHz and key down.

u Push [TRANSMIT] to return to the receive condition.

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

11-1

CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 11

■ Time set mode ………………………………………………………… 11-2

■ Daily timer setting ……………………………………………………… 11-3

■ Setting sleep timer …………………………………………………… 11-4

■ Timer operation ………………………………………………………… 11-4

11-2

■ Time set mode

The IC-7800 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour clock

with daily power ON/OFF timer functions. Before oper-

ating these timer functions, set the current date and

time.

q Push [EXIT/SET] to close multi-function screen, if

necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

e Push [F-4•TIME] to select time set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.

t Rotate the main dial to set or select the desired

value or condition.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit time set mode.

[EXIT/SET][F-4•DEF]

[ABC]/[abc] [123]/[Symbol] [F-3•Ω ≈][F-5•EDIT]/[F-5•SET]

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] Main dial

CLOCK AND TIMERS

Sets the date.

z Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select between the year and the

month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them.

• The date setting and “DATE-set Push [SET]” indication

blink.

x Push [F-5•SET] to set the date.

Sets the local time.

z Rotate the main dial to set the local time.

• The time setting and “TIME-set Push [SET]” indication

blink.

x Push [F-5•SET] to set the time.

Turns the clock 2 indication ON and OFF.

The clock 2 is convenient to indicate the UTC or other

country’s local time, etc.

• ON : The clock 2 is displayed below the local time

indication.

• OFF : The clock 2 does not display.

Sets the desired off-set time period for clock 2 display

within –24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default value.

Sets the desired 3-character name for clock 2.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _

and spaces can be used.

z Push [F-5•EDIT] to select the name edit condition.

• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.

x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to select

the character.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-

bols.

• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.

• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.

• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.

• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also

enter numerals.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.

11-3

■ Daily timer setting

The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-

ically on the specified day and time, with the specified

frequency settings in each main and sub readout.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [TIMER] for 1 sec. to select timer set screen.

e Push one of [F-1•TIMER1] to [F-5•TIMER5] to se-

lect the desired timer.

r Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON

and OFF.

t Push [F-2•≈] to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate the

main dial to select the desired day of the week.

• Select “– – –” not to specify the day of the week. The

timer will function every day in this case.

• Once a day of the week is selected, push [F-4•CLR] for

1 sec. to select “– – –.”

y Push [F-2•≈] to select the “REPEAT” cell, then ro-

tate the main dial to select the repeat function ON

and OFF.

• ON : The timer functions every selected day of the

week. (repeats)

• OFF : The timer does not repeat.

u Push [F-2•≈] to select the “ON” cell, then rotate the

main dial to set the desired transceiver power ON

time.

• When using power OFF timer only, push [F-4•CLR] for

1 sec. to select “– – –.”

i Push [F-2•≈] to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate the

main dial to set the desired transceiver power OFF

time.

• When using power ON timer only, push [F-4•CLR] for

1 sec. to select “– – –.”

o Push [F-2•≈] to select the “MAIN” cell, then rotate

the main dial to select the desired memory channel

number in the main readout.

• If using the currently set VFO condition in main readout,

push [F-4•CLR] for 1 sec. to select “– – –.”

!0 Push [F-2•≈] to select the “SUB” cell, then rotate the

main dial to select the desired memory channel

number in the sub readout.

• If using the currently set VFO condition in sub readout,

push [F-4•CLR] for 1 sec. to select “– – –.”

!1 Push [F-7•SET] to set the timer.

• The timer indicator above [TIMER] switch lights green.

!2 Repeat steps e to !1 to set other timers, if desired.

!3 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.

[EXIT/SET]

[F-4•TIMER4]/[F-4•CLR]

[F-3•TIMER3]

[TIMER]

[F-7•SET]

[F-1•TIMER1]/[F-1•Ω]

[F-2•TIMER2]/[F-2•≈]

Main dial

CLOCK AND TIMERS

11-4

■ Setting sleep timer

The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF au-

tomatically after passing the set period. The timer can

be set to 5–120 min. in 5 min. steps.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [TIMER] for 1 sec. to select timer set screen.

e Push [F-7•SLEEP] to select the sleep timer set con-

dition.

• “– – –” blinks.

r Set the desired time period using the main dial.

• “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blinks.

• Push [F-4•CLR] to select “– – –” to cancel the setting.

t Push [F-7•SET] to set the time.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the setting.

• The timer indicator above [TIMER] switch lights green.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.

u The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after

the sleep timer period elapses.

• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.

• Push [TIMER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if

desired.

■ Timer operation

q Preset the daily timer as described previously.

w Push [TIMER] momentarily to turn the timer function

ON.

• The timer indicator above this switch lights green when

the timer function is ON.

e Push [POWER] for 1 sec. to turn the power OFF.

• The timer indicator lights continuously.

r When the set time arrives, the power is automati-

cally turned ON.

t The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after

the power-off period elapses.

• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.

• Push [TIMER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if

desired.

The timer action in timer set screen must be se-

lected ON to enable the timer operation, described

in page 11-3 steps r.

[TIMER] [POWER]

[EXIT/SET]

[F-4•CLR]

[TIMER]

[F-7•SLEEP]/[F-7•SET]

Main dial

CLOCK AND TIMERS

12-1

SET MODE Section 12

■ Set mode description ………………………………………………… 12-2

D Set mode operation ………………………………………………… 12-2

D Screen arrangement ……………………………………………… 12-3

■ Level set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-4

■ ACC set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-6

■ Display set mode …………………………………………………… 12-11

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode ………………………………… 12-14

■ CF card set menu …………………………………………………… 12-22

D CF card set screen arrangement ……………………………… 12-22

D Save option set mode …………………………………………… 12-23

D Load option set mode …………………………………………… 12-24

■ File saving …………………………………………………………… 12-25

■ File loading …………………………………………………………… 12-26

■ Changing the file name ……………………………………………… 12-27

■ Deleting a file ………………………………………………………… 12-28

■ Formatting the CF card ……………………………………………… 12-28

12-2

■ Set mode description

Set mode is used for programming infrequently

changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-

7800 has a level set mode, display set mode, timer set

mode, accessory set mode, miscellaneous (others) set

mode and CF card set mode.

Set mode operation

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects

set mode menu screen.

e Push [F-1•LEVEL], [F-2•ACC], [F-3•DISP],

[F-4•TIME], [F-5•OTHERS] or [F-7•CF CARD] to

enter the desired set mode.

r For level, accessory, display and miscellaneous

(others) set mode, push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle wide

and normal screen.

t Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item,

then rotate main dial to adjust/select the desired

value or condition.

• Pushing [F-3•Ω≈] operation may be necessary for

some items.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.

[F-1•LEVEL] [F-2•ACC]

[F-3•DISP]

[F-5•OTHERS][F-4•TIME]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial

[F-7•CF CARD]

SET MODE

12-3

SET MODE

Screen arrangement

• Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2)

• Level set mode (p. 12-4)

• ACC set mode (p. 12-6)

• Time set mode (p. 11-2)

• Display set mode (p. 12-11)

• Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (p. 12-14)

• CF card set menu (p. 12-22)

12-4

SET MODE

■ Level set mode

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in SSB

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in FM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in SSB

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

12-5

SET MODE

■ Level set mode (continued)

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM

mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

Sets the transmission passband width to wide setting

by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequencies.

Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz

Higher freq.: 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz (default)

Sets the transmission passband width to middle set-

ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequen-

cies.

Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz

Higher freq.: 2500, 2700 (default), 2800 and 2900 Hz

Sets the transmission passband width to narrow set-

ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequen-

cies.

Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)

Higher freq.: 2500 (default), 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz

Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from 0 to

100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Sets the side tone output level from 0 to 100% in 1%

steps. (default: 50%)

Turns the side tone output level limiting capability from

ON and OFF. (default: ON)

Sets the key-touch beep output level from 0 to 100%

in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Turns the key-touch beep output level limiting capa-

bility from ON and OFF. (default: ON)

12-6

SET MODE

■ Level set mode (continued)

Sets the ratio for audio output level from the head-

phone toward to the internal speaker within 0.60 to

1.40 range in 0.01 steps. (default: 1.00)

Selects the headphone audio output. • OFF : Outputs the main band’s audio from the left,

and sub band’s audio from the right. (default)

• ON : Outputs the mixed audio.

Selects the desired band for the audio and squelch

signals output from [ACC1–A] (Audio: pin 5, Squelch:

pin 6) from MAIN and SUB.

• MAIN : Main band’s AF and squelch signals are

output from [ACC1–A]. (default)

• SUB : Sub band’s AF and squelch signals are out-

put from [ACC1–A].

Selects the desired band for the audio and squelch

signals output from [ACC1–B] (Audio: pin 5, Squelch:

pin 6) from MAIN and SUB.

• MAIN : Main band’s AF and squelch signals are

output from [ACC1–B].

• SUB : Sub band’s AF and squelch signals are out-

put from [ACC1–B]. (default)

Sets the desired audio output level, output from

[ACC1–A], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.

• Outputs approx. 200 mV at 50% (default) setting.

Sets the desired audio output level, output from

[ACC1–B], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.

• Outputs approx. 200 mV at 50% (default) setting.

Sets the desired output level of [S/P DIF], within 0 to

100% in 1% steps. (default: 100%)

Sets the desired audio input level for modulation from

[ACC1–A].

• Approx. 100 mV at 50% (default) setting.

■ ACC set mode

12-7

SET MODE

Sets the desired audio input level for modulation from

[ACC1–B].

• Approx. 100 mV at 50% (default) setting.

Sets the desired input level for modulation from

[S/P DIF], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.

(default: 50%)

■ ACC set mode (continued)

Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input

when data mode is not in use.

• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC-A : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B : Use the signals from [ACC1–B]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–A] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B

: Use the signals from [MIC],

[ACC1–A] and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

(default)

• S/P DIF : Use the signals from [S/P DIF].

Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input

when data 1 mode (D1) is in use.

• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC-A : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

(pin 4). (default)

• ACC-B : Use the signals from [ACC1–B]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–A] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B

: Use the signals from [MIC],

[ACC1–A] and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• S/P DIF : Use the signals from [S/P DIF].

12-8

SET MODE

■ ACC set mode (continued)

Selects the desired band for the operating frequency

band control signal output from [ACC2–B] (pin 4).

• MAIN : Outputs the band signal displayed in main

readout.

• SUB : Outputs the band signal displayed in sub

readout.

• TX : Outputs the band signal, that can be trans-

mitted. (default)

Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input

when data 2 mode (D2) is in use.

• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC-A : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B : Use the signals from [ACC1–B]

(pin 4). (default)

• MIC,ACC-A : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–A] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B

: Use the signals from [MIC],

[ACC1–A] and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• S/P DIF : Use the signals from [S/P DIF].

Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input

when data 3 mode (D3) is in use.

• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC-A : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B : Use the signals from [ACC1–B]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–A] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B : Use the signals from [MIC] and

[ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B : Use the signals from [ACC1–A]

and [ACC1–B] (pin 4). (default)

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B

: Use the signals from [MIC],

[ACC1–A] and [ACC1–B] (pin 4).

• S/P DIF : Use the signals from [S/P DIF].

Selects the desired band for the operating frequency

band control signal output from [ACC2–A] (pin 4).

• MAIN : Outputs the band signal displayed in main

readout.

• SUB : Outputs the band signal displayed in sub

readout.

• TX : Outputs the band signal, that can be trans-

mitted. (default)

12-9

SET MODE

Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from

Lead and MOS-FET.

Select the suitable relay type when connecting a non-

Icom linear amplifier.

• Lead : Use mechanical relay.

(16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default)

• MOS-FET: Use semiconductor type relay.

(250 V/200 mA max.)

■ ACC set mode (continued)

Selects the desired item for an external meter indica-

tion (main readout).

• Auto : Outputs the receiving signal strength level

during receive, and outputs the selected

level (selected with [METER]), during

transmit. (default)

• S(MAIN) : Outputs the receiving signal strength level

during receive.

• Po : Outputs the transmitting power level dur-

ing transmit.

• SWR : Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.

• ALC : Outputs the ALC level during transmit.

• COMP : Outputs the compression level during

transmit.

•VD : Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the

final amplifier MOS-FETs.

•ID : Outputs the drain current of the final am-

plifier MOS-FETs.

Selects the desired item for an external meter indica-

tion (sub readout).

• Auto : Outputs the receiving signal strength level

during receive, and outputs the selected

level (selected with [METER]), during

transmit. (default)

• S(MAIN) : Outputs the receiving signal strength level

during receive.

• Po : Outputs the transmitting power level dur-

ing transmit.

• SWR : Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.

• ALC : Outputs the ALC level during transmit.

• COMP : Outputs the compression level during

transmit.

•V

D : Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the

final amplifier MOS-FETs.

•ID : Outputs the drain current of the final am-

plifier MOS-FETs.

Sets the output level for an external meter indication

(main readout) with in 0 to 100% range in 1% steps.

• Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indica-

tion. (4.7 kΩ impedance)

Sets the output level for an external meter indication

(sub readout) with in 0 to 100% range in 1% steps.

• Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indica-

tion. (4.7 kΩ impedance)

12-10

SET MODE

Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency within

0 to 100% range in 1% steps during frequency cali-

bration. (default: 50%)

Selects the transceiver’s reference signal condition

from IN, OFF and OUT.

• IN : Use an external reference signal for the IC-

7800.

• OFF : Not input/output the reference signal.

(default)

• OUT : Outputs the IC-7800 reference signal to ex-

ternally connected equipment(s) for their ref-

erence.

NOTE: If the applied reference signal is off-fre-

quency, or no signal is applied with “IN” selection,

the IC-7800 will not work properly. Select “OFF” or

“OUT” then reboot the IC-7800 in such case.

■ ACC set mode (continued)

12-11

SET MODE

Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0 (dark) to 100%

(bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1 (dark)

to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80)

Selects the desired display type from A, B and C.

(default: A)

Selects the desired font for frequency readout from

Italic (1), Italic (2), Italic (3), Italic (4), Round (1),

Round (2), Round (3), Shadow (1), Shadow (2),

Shadow (3), Qubic (1), Qubic (2), Qubic (3), Qubic

(4), IC-780 (1), IC-780 (2), IC-780 (3) and IC-780 (4).

(default: Italic (1))

Selects the desired font for the displays other than fre-

quency readout from Normal and Slim.

(default: Normal)

■ Display set mode

Selects the desired S/RF meter type during normal

screen indication from Standard, Edgewise and Bar.

(default: Standard)

Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide

screen or mini scope indication from Edgewise and

Bar. (default: Edgewise)

Turns the meter peak hold function ON and OFF.

(default: ON)

This function is used for the bar meter only.

Set meter needle response from SLOW, MID and

FAST. (default: MID)

This setting is effective for the standard and edge-

wise meter type selections only.

12-12

SET MODE

Selects the pop-up display for the APF filter width

from ON and OFF.

(default: ON)

Turns the pop-up indication capability when the notch

filter width is changed from ON to OFF.

(default: ON)

Select “ON” when the external display is connected.

(default: OFF)

• At least 800×600 pixel resolution is required for the dis-

play.

Selects the suitable pulse level for the connected ex-

ternal display from H and L. (default: H)

Turns the opening message screen indication capa-

bility ON and OFF. (default: ON)

Sets the memory name indication, during memory

mode operation, ON and OFF. (default: ON)

• ON : The programmed memory name is displayed

above the frequency indication.

• OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-

ory name is programmed.

■ Display set mode (continued)

Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60 min-

utes) and OFF. (default: 60 min.)

The screen saver will acts when no operation is per-

formed for the selected time period to protect the LCD

from the “burn-in” effect.

Selects the screen saver type from “Bound,” “Rota-

tion” and “Twist.” (default: Bound)

The screen saver indication can be displayed for your

reference while pushing and holding [F-5•PREVIEW].

12-13

SET MODE

Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long,

displayed in the opening screen.

Usually, you set your call sign for the opening screen.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(– / . @) and spaces can be used.

z Push [F-5•EDIT] to select the name edit condition.

• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.

x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to select

the character.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-

bols.

• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.

• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.

• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.

• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also

enter numerals.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.

■ Display set mode (continued)

12-14

SET MODE

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode

This item is used for a simple frequency check of the

transceiver. (default: OFF)

See p. 13-5 for calibration procedure.

NOTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after

checking the frequency of the transceiver.

A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con-

firm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent op-

eration. (default: ON)

The beep output level can be set in level set mode.

(p. 12-5)

A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters

or exits an amateur band. This functions independent

of the confirmation beep setting (above). (default: ON)

The beep output level can be set in level set mode.

(p. 12-5)

Sets the desired key-touch beep sound frequency

during main readout operation within 500 to 2000 Hz

in 10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz)

Set the different frequency from “Beep Sound (SUB)”

as below to distinguish between main and sub.

Sets the desired key-touch beep sound frequency

during sub readout operation within 500 to 2000 Hz in

10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz)

Set the different frequency from “Beep Sound (MAIN)”

as above to distinguish between main and sub.

When this item is set to ON, pushing [DUALWATCH]

for 1 sec. sets the sub readout frequency to the main

readout frequency and activates dualwatch operation.

(default: ON)

See p. 5-16 for details.

12-15

SET MODE

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (continued)

Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-

ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This set-

ting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is

used to input the repeater offset for an HF band.

The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.100 MHz)

Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-

ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This set-

ting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is

used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band.

The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.500 MHz)

When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to

adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC]

even while the lock function is activated.

(default: OFF)

See pgs. 6-6, 6-7 for split frequency operation details.

The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start ca-

pability which starts tuning if the SWR is higher than

1.5–3:1.

• OFF : The tuner remains OFF even when the SWR

is poor (1.5–3:1). (default)

• ON : Automatic tune starts even when the tuner is

turned OFF during HF bands operation.

Tuning of the internal antenna tuner can be started

automatically at the moment the PTT is pushed after

the operating frequency is changed (more than 1%

from last-tuned frequency). (default: OFF)

When this item is set to ON, pushing [SPLIT] for 1

sec. sets the sub readout frequency to the main read-

out frequency and activates split operation.

(default: ON)

See p. 6-7 for details.

12-16

SET MODE

Selects the transverter operation condition from Auto

and ON. (default: Auto)

• ON : Turn the transverter operation ON.

• Auto : The transceiver turns into transverter opera-

tion condition when 2 to 13.8 V DC is applied

to [ACC2–A/B] pin 6.

Sets the desired offset frequency for the transverter

operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

(default: 16.000 MHz)

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (continued)

Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark fre-

quency is switched between 1275, 1615 and

2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz)

2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal

RTTY decoder is used.

Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable

values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz)

170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal

RTTY decoder is used.

Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse

keying polarity can be selected.

(default: Normal)

When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space

are reversed.

• Normal : Key open/close = Mark/Space

• Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark

Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK

reception from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.

(default: 1500 Hz)

Selects the speech language from English and Japan-

ese. (default: English)

Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and

LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)

12-17

SET MODE

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (continued)

Selects the main dial function from MAIN and

MAIN/SUB. (default: MAIN/SUB)

• MAIN : The main dial functions only when ac-

cessing to main readout.

• MAIN/SUB : The main dial functions when access-

ing to main readout, as well as when

accessing to sub readout with [SUB]

switch operation.

Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial.

When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step

automatically changes several times as selected.

There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fastest)

and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)

• HIGH : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Fastest tun-

ing step during rapid rotation. (default)

• LOW : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Faster tun-

ing step during rapid rotation.

• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

Sets the auto tuning step function for the sub dial.

When rotating the sub dial rapidly, the tuning step au-

tomatically changes several times as selected.

There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fastest)

and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)

• HIGH : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Fastest tun-

ing step during rapid rotation. (default)

• LOW : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Faster tun-

ing step during rapid rotation.

• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

Sets the number of memo pad channels available. 5

or 10 memo pads can be set. (default: 5)

The IC-7800 speech processor has frequency, mode

and signal level announcement. Signal level an-

nouncement can be deactivated if desired.

(default: ON)

When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not an-

nounced.

Selects the operating mode speech capability when a

mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF.

(default: OFF)

When “ON” is selected, the selected operating mode

is announced when a mode switch is pushed.

12-18

SET MODE

Selects [DIGI-SEL] control function from DIGI-SEL

and APF.

• DIGI-SEL : [DIGI-SEL] control functions as the digi-

tal selector operation. (default)

• APF : [DIGI-SEL] control functions as the

audio peak filter adjustment.

Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned when

the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are pushed and

held. High or low can be selected.

• HIGH : High speed (default; 50 tuning steps/sec.)

• LOW : Low speed (25 tuning steps/sec.)

Selects the RIT/∂TX frequency clearing instruction

with the [CLEAR] switch.

• ON : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR]

is pushed momentarily.

• OFF : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR]

is pushed for 1 sec. (default)

Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation from

Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.

• Auto : The auto notch can only be used.

• Manual : The manual notch can only be used.

• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can

be used. (default)

Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from

Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.

• Auto : The auto notch can only be used.

• Manual : The manual notch can only be used.

• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can

be used. (default)

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (continued)

Selects filter set screen indication condition from Fix

and Auto (by FILTER,PBT Operation).

• Fix : When filter screen accessed with the main

band’s [FILTER] switch, the screen shows

main band’s filter width and PBT conditions

only; when filter set screen accessed with the

sub band’s [FILTER] switch, the screen shows

sub band’s filter width and PBT conditions only.

• Auto (by FILTER,PBT Operation)

: Filter set screen indication can be switched be-

tween main and sub bands filter width and PBT

conditions when either band’s [FILTER] switch

or [TWIN PBT] control is operated. (default)

12-19

SET MODE

Selects the displayed frequency shift function from

ON and OFF. (default: OFF)

When this function is activated, the receiving signal

can be kept to receive even when the operating mode

is changed between SSB and CW.

The frequency shifting value may differ according

to the CW pitch setting.

• ON : The displayed frequency shifts when the op-

erating mode is changed between SSB and

CW.

• OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift.

Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW nor-

mal mode. (default: LSB)

Selects the desired band(s) for audio output from

[MIC] connector (pin 8) from MAIN+SUB and SUB.

(default: MAIN+SUB)

• MAIN+SUB : Outputs both main and sub bands

audio.

• SUB : Outputs sub band audio only.

Sets the external keypad for voice memory transmis-

sion capability ON and OFF.

See page 2-6 for the equivalent circuit of an external

keypad and connection.

• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,

transmits the desired voice memory contents

during a phone mode operation.

• OFF : External keypad does not function. (default)

Sets the external keypad for keyer memory transmis-

sion capability ON and OFF.

See page 2-6 for the equivalent circuit of an external

keypad and connection.

• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,

transmits the desired keyer memory contents

during CW mode operation.

• OFF : External keypad does not function. (default)

Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800,

9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are available. (default:

Auto)

When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-

cally set according to the data rate of connected con-

troller.

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (continued)

12-20

SET MODE

■ Miscellaneous (Others) set mode (continued)

Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7800

connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers.

When “ON” is selected, changing the frequency, op-

erating mode, etc. on the IC-7800 automatically

changes those of connected transceivers (or re-

ceivers) and vice versa.

Select [RS-232C] connector output data format from

CI-V and Decode.

• CI-V : Outputs data in CI-V format. (default)

• Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code

format.

Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when

“Decode” is selected in “RS-232C Function” above;

settings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.

(default: 9600)

Selects the connected keyboard type from Japanese,

English, United Kingdom, French, French (Canadian),

German, Portuguese, Portuguese (Brazilian), Span-

ish, Spanish (Latin American) and Italian.

(default: English)

Sets the time period for delay within 100 to

1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.)

When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed

and held for the set period, the character is input con-

tinuously.

To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has

its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code.

The IC-7800’s address is 6Ah.

When 2 or more IC-7800’s are connected to an op-

tional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER, rotate the main dial

to select a different address for each IC-7800; the

range is 01h to 7Fh.

12-21

SET MODE

■ Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

Sets subnet mask for the IC-7800 when connecting

to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the

Ethernet connector.

Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the

setting effective. See p. 16-7 for details.

Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard

within 2.0 to 30.0 cps in 0.1 cps steps.

(default: 10.9 cps) *cps=character per second

When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed

and held, the character is repeatedly input with the set

speed.

Sets IP address for the IC-7800 when connecting to

your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the

Ethernet connector.

Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the

setting effective. See p. 16-7 for details.

■ CF card set menu

CF card set screen arrangement

• CF card set menu

• Setting load screen (p. 12-26)

• Load option set mode (p. 12-24)

• Firmware update (p. 16-4)

• Format menu (p. 12-28)

• Setting save screen (p. 12-25)

• Save option set mode (p. 12-23)

12-22

SET MODE

12-23

SET MODE

Selects file saving condition from All and Select.

(default: All)

• All : Saves all the following contents.

• Select : Saves the selected contents only.

Selects memory channel contents and other settings

saving condition from YES and NO. (default: YES)

• YES : Saves memory channel contents and set-

tings of miscellaneous (Other) set mode.

• NO : Does not save.

Selects the voice TX memory saving condition from

YES and NO. (default: YES)

• YES : Saves the voice TX memory.

• NO : Does not save.

Selects the voice RX memory saving condition from

YES and NO. (default: NO)

• YES : Saves the voice RX memory.

• NO : Does not save.

Save option set mode

Selects file saving format from Now Ver and Old Ver.

(default: Now Ver)

Additional selections are available for Old Ver and in-

dicated in brackets.

• Now Ver : Saves the file in the current firmware

version format being used.

• Old Ver : Saves the file in the firmware version

format that is indicated in brackets.

12-24

SET MODE

Load option set mode

Selects file loading condition from All and Select.

(default: Select)

• All : Loads and sets the all following contents.

• Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only.

Selects the antenna memory setting loading condition

YES and NO. (default: NO).

• YES : Loads and sets the antenna memory.

• NO : Use the original antenna memory setting.

Selects the reference signal setting loading condition

YES and NO. (default: NO).

• YES : Loads and sets the reference signal setting.

• NO : Use the original reference signal setting.

Selects the IP address and subnet mask setting load-

ing condition YES and NO. (default: NO).

• YES : Loads and sets the IP address and subnet

mask setting.

• NO : Use the original IP address and subnet

mask setting.

Selects the CI-V address setting loading condition

YES and NO. (default: NO).

• YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address setting.

• NO : Use the original CI-V address setting.

Selects memory channel contents and other settings

loading condition YES and NO. (default: YES).

• YES : Loads and sets memory channel contents

and other settings.

• NO : Use the original memory channel contents

and other settings.

Selects the voice TX memory loading condition YES

and NO. (default: YES).

• YES : Loads and sets the voice TX memory.

• NO : Use the original the voice TX memory.

Selects the voice RX memory loading condition YES

and NO. (default: NO).

• YES : Loads and sets the voice RX memory.

• NO : Use the original the voice RX memory.

12-25

SET MODE

■ File saving

Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. can

be saved into the CF (Compact Flash) memory card

for backup.

q During set mode menu screen indication, push

[F-7•CF CARD] to select CF card set menu screen.

w Push [F-2•SAVE] to select setting save screen.

e Change the following conditions if desired.

• File name:

z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-

dition.

• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the

file name, if necessary.

x Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the

character group, then rotate the main dial to

select the character.

• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (nu-

merals); [Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~

@ can be selected.

• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]

to move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete

a character and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a

space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

• Save option

z Push [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option set

mode.

x Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the item,

then rotate the main dial to select the desired

setting. (see p. 12-23 for details)

• “Text” is the default setting.

• Push [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default set-

ting.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous in-

dication.

• Saving location

z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view

screen.

x Select the desired directory or folder in the CF

memory card.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] to select the upper directory.

• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the

same directory.

• Push [F-4•Ω≈] for 1 sec. to select a folder in the

directory.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.

• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete the

folder.

• Push [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a new

folder. (Edit the name with the same manner as

the “• File name” above.)

c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file

name.

r Push [F-6•SAVE].

• Confirmation screen appears.

t Push [F-6•OK] to save.

• After saving is completed, return to CF card set menu

automatically.

[F-1•DIR/FILE]

[F-5•OPTION][F-4•EDIT]

[F-6•SAVE]/[F-6•OK]

[F-7•WIDE]/[F-7•CANCEL]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial

12-26

SET MODE

■ File loading

By loading the saved setting file from the CF card, you

can easily set up another IC-7800— several operators

settings can easily be applied to one IC-7800.

q During set mode menu screen indication, push

[F-7•CF CARD] to select CF card set menu screen.

w Push [F-1•LOAD] to select setting load screen.

• The indicator beside the CF card slot blinks.

• After the CF card contents are displayed, the indicator

goes off.

e Push [F-5•OPTION] to select load option set mode,

then set the desired loading conditions, if desired.

• See page 12-24 for details.

r Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired set-

ting file.

t Push [F-4•LOAD].

• Confirmation screen appears.

y Push [F-6•OK] to starts loading.

• After the loading is completed, the message dialog, “Re-

boot the IC-7800,” appears.

u Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make

the setting effective .

[F-1•DIR/FILE]

[F-5•OPTION][F-4•LOAD]

[F-6•SORT]/[F-6•OK]

[F-7•WIDE]/[F-7•CANCEL]

[F-3•Z][F-2•Y]

[EXIT/SET]

12-27

■ Changing the file name

The file name, saved in the CF card, can be re-named

from the transceiver as desired.

q During setting save screen display, push

[F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.

• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.

• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-

able as the default.

• After the folder is selected, push [F-2•Ω≈] for 1 sec. to

display content folder(s), if available.

w Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.

e Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired file.

r Push [F-5•REN/DEL] momentarily to select the file

name edit condition.

t Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the charac-

ter group, then rotate the main dial to select the

character.

• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (numerals);

[Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be se-

lected.

• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈] to

move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete a char-

acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.

• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter

numerals.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

[F-1•DIR/FILE]

[F-5•REN/DEL][F-4•Ω ≈]

[F-6•MAKE]

[F-7•WIDE]/[F-7•CANCEL]

[F-3•Z][F-2•Y]

[EXIT/SET]

SET MODE

12-28

SET MODE

■ Deleting a file

RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is ir-

reversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a

setting file!

q During setting save screen display, push

[F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.

• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.

• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-

able as the default.

• After the folder is selected, push [F-2•Ω≈] for 1 sec. to

display content folder(s), if available.

w Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.

e Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired file to

be deleted.

r Push [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec.

• Confirmation screen appears.

t Push [F-6•OK] to delete.

• After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-

matically.

■ Formatting the CF card

A saved data in the CF memory card can be erased.

IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in

the CF memory card. Making a backup file on your

PC is recommended.

q During CF card set menu display, push

[F-4•FORMAT] for 1 sec.

• Confirmation screen appears.

w Push [F-6•OK] to format.

• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel.

e Returns to CF card set menu indication automati-

cally.

13-1

MAINTENANCE Section 13

■ Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………… 13-2

D Transceiver power ………………………………………………… 13-2

D Transmit and receive ……………………………………………… 13-2

D Scanning …………………………………………………………… 13-3

D Display ……………………………………………………………… 13-3

■ Main dial brake adjustment ………………………………………… 13-3

■ Voice synthesizer operation ………………………………………… 13-3

■ SWR reading …………………………………………………………… 13-4

■ Screen type and font selections …………………………………… 13-4

■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ……………………………… 13-5

■ Opening the transceiver’s case ……………………………………… 13-6

■ Clock backup battery replacement ………………………………… 13-6

■ Fuse replacement …………………………………………………… 13-7

■ Resetting the CPU …………………………………………………… 13-7

■ About protection indications ………………………………………… 13-8

■ Screen Saver Function ……………………………………………… 13-8

■ Troubleshooting

The following chart is designed to help you correct

problems which are not equipment malfunctions.

If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or

solve it through the use of this chart, contact you near-

est Icom Dealer or Service Center.

Transceiver power

Transmit and receive

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

No sounds come out from

the speaker.

Sensitivity is too low, and

only strong signals are

audible.

Received audio is unclear

or distorted.

The [ANT] switch does not

function

Transmitting is impossible.

Output power is too low.

No contact possible with

another station.

Transmit signal is unclear

or distorted.

Repeater cannot be

accessed.

• Volume level is too low.

• The squelch is closed.

• The transceiver is in transmitting condition.

• The antenna is not connected properly.

• The antenna for another band is selected.

• The antenna is not properly tuned.

• The attenuator is activated.

• Wrong operating mode is selected.

• PBT function is activated.

• Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a

strong signal.

• Preamp is activated.

• The noise reduction is activated and the [NR]

control is too far clockwise.

• The antenna switch has not been activated.

• The operating frequency is not inside a ham

band.

• [RF PWR] is set too far counterclockwise

• [DRIVE] is set too far counterclockwise

• [MIC] is set too far counterclockwise

• The antenna for another band is selected.

• The antenna is not properly tuned.

• RIT or ∂TX function is activated.

• Split frequency function and/or dualwatch are

activated.

• [MIC] is set too far clockwise

• Split frequency function is not activated.

• Programmed subaudible tone frequency is

wrong.

• Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis-

tening level.

• Turn [SQL] to 10 o’clock position to open the

squelch.

• Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the

SEND line of an external unit, if connected.

• Re-connect to the antenna connector.

• Select an antenna suitable for the operating

frequency.

• Push [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually tune the

antenna.

• Push [ATT] several times to select “ATT OFF.”

• Select a suitable operating mode.

• Push [PBT CLR] for 1 sec. to reset the function.

• Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF.

• Push [P.AMP] once or twice to turn the function

OFF.

• Set the [NR] control for maximum readability.

• Set the antenna switch in set mode to “Auto” or

“Manual.”

• Set the frequency to be in a ham band.

• Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise.

• Set [DRIVE] to a suitable position.

• Set [MIC] to a suitable position.

• Select an antenna suitable for the operating

frequency.

• Push [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually tune the

antenna.

• Push [RIT] or [∂TX] to turn the function OFF.

• Push [SPLIT] and/or [DUALWATCH] to turn the

function OFF.

• Set [MIC] to a suitable position.

• Push [SPLIT] to to turn the function ON

• Reset the frequency using set mode.

p. 3-9

p. 3-12

—

p. 10-2

p. 10-5

p. 5-9

p. 3-8

p. 5-12

p. 5-17

p. 5-9

p. 5-18

p. 10-4

p. 3-5

p. 3-12

p. 3-13

p. 3-12

p. 10-2

p. 10-5

pgs. 5-10,

6-4

pgs. 5-16,

6-4

p. 3-12

p. 6-6

p. 4-32

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

13-2

MAINTENANCE

Power does not come on

when the [POWER] switch

is pushed.

• Power cable is improperly connected.

• The internal power supply is turned OFF.

• Circuit breaker is tripped.

• Re-connect the AC power cable correctly.

• Turn the internal power supply ON.

• Check for the cause, then re-set the circuit

breaker.

p. 2-4

p. 3-2

—

13-3

Scanning

Display

■ Main dial brake adjustment

The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit

you preference.

The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of

the front panel. See the figure at left.

Slide the brake adjustment to comfortable tension level

while turning the dial continuously and evenly in one

direction.

■ Voice synthesizer operation

The IC-7800 has built-in voice synthesizer to announce

the frequency, mode, etc. (S-meter level can also be

announced—p. 12-17) in clear, electronically-gener-

ated voice, in English (or Japanese).

➥ Push [SPEECH] to announce the currently selected

frequency, etc.

• Push [SPEECH] for 1 sec. to additionally announce the

selected mode.

➥ Pushing a mode switch also announces the appro-

priate mode. (p. 12-17)

The output level of the voice synthesizer can be ad-

justed in level set mode. (p. 12-5)

[SPEECH] for sub

[SPEECH] for main

Light

Heavy

MAINTENANCE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Programmed scan does

not stop.

Programmed scan does

not start.

Memory scan does not

start

Select memory scan does

not start

• Squelch is open.

•

The same frequencies have been programmed

in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2.

• 2 or more memory channels have not been

programmed.

• 2 or more memory channels have not been

designated as select channels.

• Set [SQL] to the threshold point.

• Program different frequencies in scan edge

memory channel P1 and P2.

• Program more than 2 memory channels.

• Designate more than 2 memory channels as

select channels for the scan.

p. 3-9

p. 8-4

p. 9-7

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

The displayed frequency

does not change properly.

• The dial lock function is activated.

• A set mode screen is selected.

• The internal CPU has malfunctioned.

•

Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF.

• Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set

mode screen.

• Reset the CPU.

p. 5-18

p. 12-2

p. 13-7

13-4

■ SWR reading

The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the transmis-

sion line in all modes.

q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner OFF.

w Push [METER] for 1 sec. to display multi-function

meter.

e Push [RTTY/PSK] once or twice to select RTTY

mode.

r Push [TRANSMIT].

t Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise past the 12 o’clock po-

sition for more than 30 W output power.

y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage.

u Push [EXIT/SET] to close multi-function meter.

The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter

to the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1.

■ Screen type and font selections

3 types of screen images and 18 types of frequency

readout indication fonts are available in the IC-7800.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

e Push [F-3•DISP] to enter display set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Display Type”

item when selecting the screen image, select “Dis-

play Font” when selecting the frequency readout in-

dication font.

t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen

image or font.

• Screen image is selectable from A, B and C.

• Italic (1)/(2)/(3)/(4), Round (1)/(2)/(3), Shadow (1)/(2)/(3),

Qubic (1)/(2)/(3)/(4) and IC-780 (1)/(2)/(3)/(4) are avail-

able for the frequency readout font.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit from display set

mode.

ALC

52V

1.5

∞

100

150

200

250

SWR

COMP

60dB

Better than 1.5:1

[RF PWR]

[RTTY/PSK][EXIT/SET]

[METER][TRANSMIT]

[TUNER]

MAINTENANCE

• Screen image example— type C

13-5

■ Frequency calibration (approximate)

A very accurate frequency counter is required to cali-

brate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a

rough check may be performed by receiving radio sta-

tion WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency sig-

nals.

CAUTION: The IC-7800 has been thoroughly ad-

justed and tested at the factory before being

shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.

q Push [SSB] to select USB mode.

w Push [PBT CLEAR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT set-

ting and make sure that the RIT/∂TX function is not

activated.

e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station

minus 1 kHz.

• When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as

a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for

14.99900 MHz.

• Other standard frequencies can be used.

r Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

• Calibration marker item t Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

y Push [F-5•OTHERS] to enter miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

u Push [F-1•Y] several times to select the “Calibra-

tion Marker” item.

i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-

tion marker ON.

o Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to set mode menu

screen.

!0 Push [F-2•ACC] to enter accessory set mode.

!1 Push [F-2•Z] several times to select the “REF Ad-

just” item.

!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with

the received standard signal as shown at left.

• REF Adjust item • Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same

frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.

!3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in miscellaneous

(others) set mode.

!4 Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•ACC]/[F-2•Z]

[F-5•OTHERS]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial

[F-7•SET]

MAINTENANCE

13-6

■ Opening the transceiver’s case

Follow the case opening procedures shown here when

you want to replace the clock backup battery or inter-

nal fuse.

CAUTION!: DISCONNECT the AC power cable

from the transceiver before performing any work on

the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of elec-

tric shock and/or equipment damage.

CAUTION!: The transceiver weighs approx. 25 kg

(55 lb). Always have two people available to lift or

invert over the transceiver.

q Remove the 8 screws from the top of the trans-

ceiver and the 6 screws from the sides, then lift up

the top cover.

w Turn the transceiver upside-down.

CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR

ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is

upside down. This may damage the transceiver.

e Remove 7 screws from the bottom, and the 6

screws from the sides, then lift up the bottom cover.

■ Clock backup battery replacement

The IC-7800 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032) in-

side for clock and timer functions. The usual life of the

backup battery is approximately 2 years.

When the backup battery exhausted, the transceiver

transmits and receives normally but cannot retain the

current time.

WARNING: DISCONNECT the AC power cable

from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver’s

cover.

q Remove the top cover as shown above.

w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the

front panel as illustrated at left.

• Make sure the battery polarity is correct.

e Return the top cover to the original position.

r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. 11-2)

MAINTENANCE

13-7

■ Fuse replacement

When no external DC output is available from [EXT

DC] and ACC connectors, the internal fuse may be

open. Replace the fuse in this case.

WARNING: DISCONNECT the AC power cable

from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver’s

cover.

q Remove the bottom cover as shown left.

w Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated

one (FGB 2 A) as shown at left.

e Replace the bottom cover.

■ Resetting the CPU

q Turn the main power switch on the rear panel ON.

• Make sure the transceiver power is still OFF.

w While pushing and holding [F-INP•ENT] and [MW],

push [POWER] to turn power ON.

• The internal CPU is reset.

• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.

• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies

when resetting is complete.

e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if de-

sired.

NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-

tents in memory channels and returns programmed

values in set mode to default values.

[F-INP•ENT][MW][POWER]

MAINTENANCE

ALL CLEAR

13-8

■ About protection indications

The IC-7800 has a 2-step protection function to protect

the final power amplifiers.

The protector detects the power amplifier temperature

and activates when the temperature becomes ex-

tremely high.

• Power down transmission

Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W.

“LMT” appears beside the transmit indicator during

transmit.

• Transmission inhibit

Deactivates the transmitter.

The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during

transmit.

When the protector is activated, wait until the power

amplifier cools down using the transceiver in stand-by

or receive condition.

NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF.

The internal cooling fan does not function, so it will

take longer to cool the transceiver.

The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in

the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.

■ Screen saver function

The IC-7800 has a screen saver function to protect the

LCD from the “burn-in” effect.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

e Push [F-4•DISPLAY] to enter display set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z] several times to select the

“Screen Saver Function” item.

t Rotate main dial to select the desired time period

for the screen saver activation from 15, 30, 60 min.

and OFF.

• Deactivate the screen saver with “OFF” selection.

y Push [F-2•Z] to select the “Screen Saver Type”

item.

u Rotate main dial to select the screen saver type

from “Bound,” “Rotation” and “Twist.”

• Push and hold [F-5•PREVIEW] to display the indication

for your reference.

i Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•ACC]/[F-2•Z]

[F-5•PREVIEW]

[EXIT/SET] Main dial

[F-7•SET][F-4•DISPLAY]

Check the temperature

MAINTENANCE

14-1

CONTROL COMMAND Section 14

■ Remote jack (CI-V) information ……………………………………… 14-2

D CI-V connection example ………………………………………… 14-2

D Data format ………………………………………………………… 14-2

D Command table …………………………………………………… 14-9

D To send/read memory contents …………………………………… 14-9

D Band stacking register …………………………………………… 14-9

D Codes for memory keyer contents ……………………………… 14-9

D Codes for memory name, opening message

and clock 2 name contents ……………………………………… 14-9

D Offset frequency setting ………………………………………… 14-10

D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting ………………… 14-10

D SSB transmission passband width setting …………………… 14-10

D Color setting ……………………………………………………… 14-10

D Bandscope edge frequency setting …………………………… 14-10

D Data mode with filter width setting ……………………………… 14-10

D Antenna memory setting ………………………………………… 14-10

14-2

■ Remote jack (CI-V) information

CI-V connection example

The transceiver can be connected through an optional

CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER to a PC equipped with an

RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V

(CI-V) controls of the transceiver.

Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or transceivers can be

connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port.

See pgs. 12-19, 12-20 for setting the CI-V condition

using set mode.

Data format

The CI-V system can be operated using the following

data formats. Data formats differ according to com-

mand numbers. A data area or sub command is added

for some commands.

Controller to IC-7800

FE FE 6A E0 Cn Sc Data area FD

Preamble

code (fixed)

Transceiver’s

default address

Controller’s

default address

Command number

(see the command table)

Sub command number

(see command table)

BCD code data for

frequency or memory

number entry

End of message

code (fixed)

OK message to controller

FE FE E0 6A FB FD

FE FE E0 6A FA FD

Preamble

code (fixed)

Controller’s

default address

Transceiver’s

default address

OK code

(fixed)

End of message

code (fixed)

NG message to controller

NG code

(fixed)

IC-7800 to controller

qwert y u

FE FE E0 6A Cn Sc Data area FD

qwert y u

9–15 V

personal

computer

ct- 17

BC-25

(optional)

IC-7800

mini-plug cable

CONTROL COMMAND

14-3

Command table

CONTROL COMMAND

Command Sub command Description

00 — Send frequency data

01 Same as Send mode data

command 06

02 — Read band edge frequencies

03 — Read operating frequency

04 — Read operating mode

05 — Set operating frequency

06 00 Select LSB

01 Select USB

02 Select AM

03 Select CW

04 Select RTTY

05 Select FM

07 Select CW-R

08 Select RTTY-R

12 Select PSK

13 Select PSK-R

07 — Select VFO mode

B0 Exchange main and sub bands

B1 Equalize main and sub bands

C0 Turn the dualwatch OFF

C1 Turn the dualwatch ON

D0 Select main band

D1 Select sub band

08 — Select memory mode

0001–0101* Select memory channel

*P1=0100, P2=0101

09 — Memory write

0A — Memory to VFO

0B — Memory clear

0E 00 Scan stop

01 Programmed/memory scan start

02 Programmed scan start

03 ∂F scan start

12 Fine programmed scan start

13 Fine ∂F scan start

22 Memory scan start

23 Select memory scan start

A1–A7 Set ∂F scan span (A1=±5 kHz;

A2=±10 kHz; A3=±20 kHz;

A4=±50 kHz; A5=±100 kHz;

A6=±500 kHz; A7=±1 MHz)

B0 Set as non-select channel

B1 Set as select channel (1=★1;

2=★2; 3=★3; when no data com-

mand is specified, the previously

set number or “★1” is selected)

B2 Set the number for select memory

scan (0=ALL; 1=★1; 2=★2; 3=★3)

D0 Set scan resume OFF

D3 Set scan resume ON

0F 00 Turn the split function OFF

01 Turn the split function ON

10 00 Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tuning step

01 Select 100 Hz tuning step

02 Select 1 kHz tuning step

03 Select 5 kHz tuning step

04 Select 9 kHz tuning step

05 Select 10 kHz tuning step

06 Select 12.5 kHz tuning step

07 Select 20 kHz tuning step

08 Select 25 kHz tuning step

Command Sub command Description

11 — Select/read attenuator (0=OFF;

1=3 dB; 2=6 dB; 3=9 dB; 4=12 dB;

5=15 dB; 6=18 dB; 7=21 dB)

12 00 + RX ANT Select/read ANT1 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

01 + RX ANT Select/read ANT2 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

02 + RX ANT Select/read ANT3 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

03 + RX ANT Select/read ANT4 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

13 00 Announce with voice synthesizer

01 (00=all data; 01=frequency and

02 S-meter level; 02=receive mode)

14 01 + Level data [AF] level setting (0=max. CCW to

255=max. CW)

02 + Level data [RF] level setting (0=max. CCW to

255=11 o’clock)

03 + Level data [SQL] level setting (0=11 o’clock to

255=max. CW)

05 + Level data [APF] level setting

(0=Pitch–550 Hz, 128=Pitch,

255=Pitch+550 Hz; 10 Hz steps)

06 + Level data [NR] level setting (0=min. to

255=max.)

07 + Level data Inside [TWIN PBT] setting or IF

shift setting (0=max. CCW,

128=center, 255=max. CW)

08 + Level data Outside [TWIN PBT] setting

(0=max. CCW, 128=center,

255=max. CW)

09 + Level data [CW PITCH] setting (0=300 Hz,

128=600 Hz, 255=900 Hz; 5 Hz

steps)

0A + Level data [RF POWER] setting (0=max.

CCW to 255=max. CW)

0B + Level data [MIC] setting (0=max. CCW to

255=max. CW)

0C + Level data [KEY SPEED] setting (0=max.

CCW to 255=max. CW)

0D + Level data [NOTCH] setting (0=low freq. to

255=high freq.)

0E + Level data [COMP] setting (0=max. CCW to

255=max. CW)

0F + Level data [DELAY] setting (0=max. CCW to

255=max. CW)

11 + Level data [AGC] control setting (0=max.

CCW to 255=max. CW)

12 + Level data [NB] control setting (0=max. CCW

to 255=max. CW)

13 + Level data [DIGI-SEL] setting (0=max. CCW

to 255=max. CW)

14 + Level data [DRIVE] setting (0=max. CCW to

255=max. CW)

15 + Level data [MONI GAIN] setting (0=max.

CCW to 255=max. CW)

16 + Level data [VOX GAIN] setting (0=max.

CCW to 255=max. CW)

17 + Level data [ANTI VOX] setting (0=max. CCW

to 255=max. CW)

18 + Level data [CONTRAST] setting (0=max.

CCW to 255=max. CW)

19 + Level data [BRIGHT] setting (0=max. CCW

to 255=max. CW)

14-4

Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Command Sub command Description

15 01 Read squelch condition

02 Read S-meter level

11 Read RF power meter

12 Read SWR meter

13 Read ALC meter

14 Read COMP meter

15 Read VD

meter

16 Read I

D meter

16 02 Preamp (0=OFF; 1=preamp 1;

2=preamp 2)

12 AGC selection (0=OFF; 1=Slow;

2=Mid; 3=Fast)

22 Noise blanker (0=OFF; 1=ON)

32 Audio peak filter (0=OFF;

1=320 Hz; 2=160 Hz; 3=80 Hz)

40 Noise reduction (0=OFF; 1=ON)

41 Auto notch (0=OFF; 1=ON)

42 Repeater tone (0=OFF; 1=ON)

43 Tone squelch (0=OFF; 1=ON)

44 Speech compressor

(0=OFF; 1=ON)

45 Monitor (0=OFF; 1=ON)

46 VOX function (0=OFF; 1=ON)

47 Break-in (0=OFF; 1=semi break-

in; 2=full break-in)

48 Manual notch (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4C VSC (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4D Manual AGC (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4E DIGI-SEL (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4F Twin peak filter (0=OFF; 1=ON)

50 Dial lock (0=OFF; 1=ON)

19 00 Read the transceiver ID

1A 00 Send/read memory contents (see

p. 14-9 for details)

01 Send/read band stacking register

contents (see p. 14-9 for details)

02 Send/read memory keyer con-

tents (see p. 14-9 for details)

03 Send/read the selected filter width

(SSB, CW, PSK: 0=50 Hz to

40=3600 Hz; RTTY: 0=50 Hz to

31=2700 Hz; AM: 0=200 Hz to

49=10 kHz)

04 Send/read the selected AGC time

constant (0=OFF, 1=0.1/0.3 sec.

to 13=6.0/8.0 sec.)

050001 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass)

level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)

050002 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble)

level (0=–5 to 10=+5)

050003 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass)

level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)

050004 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble)

level (0=–5 to 10=+5)

050005 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass)

level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)

050006 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble)

level (0=–5 to 10=+5)

050007 Send/read AM RX Tone (Bass)

level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)

050008 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble)

level (0=–5 to 10=+5)

050009 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass)

level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)

050010 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble)

level (0=–5 to 10=+5)

Command Sub command Description

1A 050011 Send/read FM RX Tone (Bass)

level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)

050012 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble)

level (0=–5 to 10=+5)

050013 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for

wide (see p. 14-10 for details)

050014 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for

mid. (see p. 14-10 for details)

050015 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for

narrow (see p. 14-10 for details)

050016 Send/read speech level (0=0% to

255=100%)

050017 Send/read CW side tone gain

(0=min. to 255=max.)

050018 Send/read CW side tone gain limit

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050019 Send/read beep gain (0=min. to

255=max.)

050020 Send/read beep gain limit (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050021 Send/read headphones output

ratio (0=0.60 to 255=1.40)

050022 Send/read headphone output

selection (0=separated, 1=mixed)

050023 Send/read AF/SQL signal output

to ACC-A (0=Main; 1=Sub)

050024 Send/read AF/SQL signal output

to ACC-B (0=Main; 1=Sub)

050025 Send/read AF output level to

ACC-A (0=0% to 255=100%)

050026 Send/read AF output level to

ACC-B (0=0% to 255=100%)

050027 Send/read S/P DIF output level

(0=0% to 255=100%)

050028 Send/read MOD output level to

ACC-A (0=0% to 255=100%)

050029 Send/read MOD output level to

ACC-B (0=0% to 255=100%)

050030 Send/read S/P DIF MOD output

level (0=0% to 255=100%)

050031 Send/read MOD input connector

during DATA OFF

(0=MIC; 1=ACC-A; 2=ACC-B;

3=MIC/ACC-A; 4=MIC/ACC-B;

5=ACC-A/ACC-B; 6=MIC/ACC-

A/ACC-B; 7=S/P DIF)

050032 Send/read MOD input connector

during DATA1

(0=MIC; 1=ACC-A; 2=ACC-B;

3=MIC/ACC-A; 4=MIC/ACC-B;

5=ACC-A/ACC-B; 6=MIC/ACC-

A/ACC-B; 7=S/P DIF)

050033 Send/read MOD input connector

during DATA2

(0=MIC; 1=ACC-A; 2=ACC-B;

3=MIC/ACC-A; 4=MIC/ACC-B;

5=ACC-A/ACC-B; 6=MIC/ACC-

A/ACC-B; 7=S/P DIF)

050034 Send/read MOD input connector

during DATA3

(0=MIC; 1=ACC-A; 2=ACC-B;

3=MIC/ACC-A; 4=MIC/ACC-B;

5=ACC-A/ACC-B; 6=MIC/ACC-

A/ACC-B; 7=S/P DIF)

14-5

Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Command Sub command Description

1A 050035 Send/read the band selection for

operating frequency band signal

output to ACC-A. (0=MAIN,

1=SUB, 2=TX)

050036 Send/read the band selection for

operating frequency band signal

output to ACC-A. (0=MAIN,

1=SUB, 2=TX)

050037 Send/read relay type selection

(0=Lead, 1=MOS-FET)

050038 Send/read main band’s external

meter output selection (0=Auto,

1=S (main), 2=Po, 3=SWR,

4=ALC, 5=COMP, 6=V

D, 7=ID)

050039 Send/read sub band’s external

meter output selection (0=Auto,

1=S (sub), 2=Po, 3=SWR,

4=ALC, 5=COMP, 6=V

D, 7=ID)

050040 Send/read main band’s external

meter output level

(0=0% to 255=100%)

050041 Send/read sub band’s external

meter output level

(0=0% to 255=100%)

050042 Send/read reference signal in/out

setting (0=OFF, 1=IN, 2=OUT)

050043 Send/read reference signal fre-

quency setting

(0=0% to 255=100%)

050044 Send/read LCD unit backlight

brightness (0=0% to 255=100%)

050045 Send/read switch indicator bright-

ness (0=0% to 255=100%)

050046 Send/read screen image type

(0=A, 1=B, 2=C)

050047 Send/read frequency readout font

(

0=Italic (1), 1=Italic (2), 2=Italic (3),

3=Italic (4), 4=Round (1),

5=Round (2), 6=Round (3),

7=Shadow (1), 8=Shadow (2),

9=Shadow (3), 10=Qubic (1),

11=Qubic (2), 12=Qubic (3),

13=Qubic (4), 14=IC-780 (1),

15=IC-780 (2), 16=IC-780 (3),

17=IC-780 (4))

050048 Send/read font for other than fre-

quency readout

(0=Normal, 1=Slim)

050049 Send/read meter type

(0=Standard, 1=Edgewise, 2=Bar)

050050 Send/read meter type during wide

screen or mini scope indication

(0=Edgewise, 1=Bar)

050051 Send/read peak hold set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050052 Send/read memory name indica-

tion setting (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050053 Send/read audio peak filter width

pop-up indication setting

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050054 Send/read manual notch width

pop-up indication setting

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050055 Send/read output signal setting for

external display (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050056 Send/read synchronous pulse

level setting (0=L, 1=H)

Command Sub command Description

1A 050057 Send/read opening message indi-

cation (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050058 Send/read opening message con-

tents (see p. 14-9 for details)

050059 Send/read date (20000101=1st

Jan. 2001 to 20991231=31st Dec.

2099)

050060 Send/read time (0000=00:00 to

2359=23:59)

050061 Send/read clock 2 function

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050062 Send/read offset time for clock 2

(240001=–24:00 to 240000=+24:00)

050063 Send/read clock 2 name (up to 3-

character; see p. 14-9)

050064 Send/read calibration marker

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050065 Send/read confirmation beep

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050066 Send/read band edge beep

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050067 Send/read main band’s beep

audio frequency

(50=500 Hz to 200=2000 Hz)

050068 Send/read sub band’s beep audio

frequency

(50=500 Hz to 200=2000 Hz)

050069 Send/read quick dualwatch func-

tion (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050070 Send/read quick split set (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050071 Send/read FM split offset –9.999

to +9.999 MHz for HF

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050072 Send/read FM split offset –9.999

to +9.999 MHz for 50 MHz

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050073 Send/read split lock set (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050074 Send/read tuner auto start set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050075 Send/read PTT tune set (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050076 Send/read transverter set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050077 Send/read transverter offset (see

p. 14-10 for details)

050078 Send/read RTTY mark frequency

(0=1275 Hz, 1=1615 Hz,

2=2125 Hz)

050079 Send/read RTTY shift width

(0=170 Hz, 1=200 Hz, 2=425 Hz)

050080 Send/read RTTY keying polarity

(0=Normal, 1=Reverse)

050081 Send/read PSK tone frequency

(0=1000 Hz, 1=1500 Hz,

2=2000 Hz)

050082 Send/read speech language

(0=English, 1=Japanese)

050083 Send/read speech speed (0=Slow,

1=Fast)

050084 Send/read S-level speech

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050085 Send/read speech with a mode

switch operation (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050086 Send/read memo pad numbers

(0=5 ch, 1=10 ch)

14-6

Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Command Sub command Description

1A 050087 Send/read main dial function

(0=MAIN, 1=MAIN+SUB)

050088 Send/read main dial auto TS

(0=OFF, 1=Low, 2=High)

050089 Send/read sub dial auto TS

(0=OFF, 1=Low, 2=High)

050090 Send/read mic. up/down speed

(0=Low, 1=High)

050091 Send/read quick RIT/∂TX clear

function (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050092 Send/read SSB notch operation

(0=Auto, 1=Manual,

2=Auto/Manual)

050093 Send/read AM notch operation

(0=Auto, 1=Manual,

2=Auto/Manual)

050094 Send/read DIGI-SEL control func-

tion (0=DIGI-SEL, 1=APF)

050095 Send/read band indication for fil-

ter set screen (0=Fix, 1=Auto)

050096 Send/read SSB/CW synchronous

tuning function (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050097 Send/read CW normal side set

(0=LSB, 1=USB)

050098 Send/read band setting for audio

output from mic. connector

(0=MAIN+SUB, 1=SUB)

050099 Send/read external keypad set

for voice memory (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050100 Send/read external keypad set

for keyer memory (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050101 Send/read CI-V transceive set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050102 Send/read RS-232C function

(0=CI-V, 1=Decode)

050103 Send/read RS-232C decode

speed (0=300, 1=1200, 2=4800,

3=9600, 4=19200)

050104 Send/read keyboard type

(00=English, 01=Japanese,

02=United Kingdom, 03=French,

04=French (Canadian),

05=German, 06=Portuguese,

07=Portuguese (Brazilian),

08=Spanish, 09=Spanish (Latin

American), 10=Italian)

050105 Send/read keyboard repeat delay

(10=100 msec. to

100=1000 msec.)

050106 Send/read keyboard repeat speed

(0=2.0 cps to 31=30.0 cps)

050107 Send/read IP address set

(0000000000000000=0.0.0.0 to

0255025502550255=255.255.25

5.255)

050108 Send/read subnet mask

(0=0.0.0.0 to 30=255.255.255.252)

050109 Send/read scope indication during

TX (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050110 Send/read scope max. hold

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050111 Send/read scope center frequen-

cy set (0=Filter center, 1=Carrier

point center, 2=Carrier point cen-

ter (Abs. Freq.))

Command Sub command Description

1A 050112 Send/read waveform color for

receiving signal

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050113 Send/read waveform color for

max. hold

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050114 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±2.5 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050115 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±5 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050116 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±10 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050117 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±25 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050118 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±50 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050119 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±100 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050120 Send/read scope sweep speed

for ±250 kHz span

(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)

050121 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050122 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 1.60 to 2.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050123 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 2.00 to 6.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050124 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 6.00 to 8.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050125 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 8.00 to 11.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050126 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 11.00 to 15.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050127 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 15.00 to 20.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050128 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 20.00 to 22.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050129 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 22.00 to 26.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050130 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 26.00 to 30.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050131 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 30.00 to 45.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050132 Send/read scope edge frequen-

cies for 45.00 to 60.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050133 Send/read auto voice monitor set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

14-7

Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Command Sub command Description

1A 050134 Send/read voice memory short

play time (3=3 sec. to 10=10 sec.)

050135 Send/read voice memory normal

record time

(5= 5 sec. to 15=15 sec.)

050136 Send/read contest number style

(0=Normal, 1=190→ANO,

2=190→ANT, 3=90→NO,

4=90→NT)

050137 Send/read count up trigger chan-

nel (1=M1, 2=M2, 3=M3, 4=M4)

050138 Send/read present number

(1–9999)

050139 Send/read CW keyer repeat time

(1=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.)

050140 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash

ratio (28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5)

050141 Send/read rise time (0=2 msec.,

1=4 msec., 2=6 msec.,

3=8 msec.)

050142 Send/read paddle polarity

(0=Normal, 1=Reverse)

050143 Send/read keyer type (0=Straight,

1=Bug-key, 2=ELEC-Key)

050144 Send/read mic. up/down keyer set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050145 Send/read RTTY decode USOS

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050146 Send/read RTTY decode new line

code (0=CR,LF,CR+LF,

1=CR+LF)

050147 Send/read RTTY diddle (0=OFF,

1=Blank, 2=Letter)

050148 Send/read RTTY TX USOS

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050149 Send/read RTTY auto CR+LF by

TX (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050150 Send/read RTTY time stamp set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050151 Send/read clock selection for time

stamp (0=Local time, 1=Clock 2)

050152 Send/read frequency stamp

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050153 Send/read received text font color

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050154 Send/read transmitted text font

color (see p. 14-10 for details)

050155 Send/read time stamp text font

color (see p. 14-10 for details)

050156 Send/read text font color in TX

buffer (see p. 14-10 for details)

050157 Send/read PSK time stamp set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050158 Send/read clock selection for time

stamp (0=Local time, 1=Clock 2)

050159 Send/read frequency stamp

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050160 Send/read received text font color

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050161 Send/read transmitted text font

color (see p. 14-10 for details)

050162 Send/read time stamp text font

color (see p. 14-10 for details)

050163 Send/read text font color in TX

buffer (see p. 14-10 for details)

Command Sub command Description

1A 050164 Send/read scan speed

(0=Low, 1=High)

050165 Send/read scan resume

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050166 Send/read antenna selection for

0.03 to 1.60 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050167 Send/read antenna selection for

1.60 to 2.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050168 Send/read antenna selection for

2.00 to 6.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050169 Send/read antenna selection for

6.00 to 8.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050170 Send/read antenna selection for

8.00 to 11.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050171 Send/read antenna selection for

11.00 to 15.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050172 Send/read antenna selection for

15.00 to 20.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050173 Send/read antenna selection for

20.00 to 22.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050174 Send/read antenna selection for

22.00 to 26.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050175 Send/read antenna selection for

26.00 to 30.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050176 Send/read antenna selection for

30.00 to 45.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050177 Send/read antenna selection for

45.00 to 60.00 MHz band

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050178 Send/read antenna temporary

memory set (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050179 Send/read antenna selection

(0=OFF, 1=Manual, 2=Auto)

050180 Send/read usage for ANT2

(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX)

050181 Send/read usage for ANT3

(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX)

050182 Send/read usage for ANT4

(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX, 2= RX)

050183 Send/read VOX delay (0=0.0 sec.

to 20=2.0 sec.)

050184 Send/read VOX voice delay

(0=OFF, 1=Short, 2=Long)

050185 Send/read NB depth (0=1 to 9=10)

050186 Send/read NB width

(0=0 to 255=255)

050187 Send/read screen saver set

(0=OFF, 1=15 min., 2=30 min.,

3=60 min.)

050188 Set/read screen saver type

(0=Bound, 1=Rotation, 2=Twist)

050189 Set/read meter response setting

(0=SLOW, 1=MID, 2=FAST)

Command table (continued)

14-8

CONTROL COMMAND

Command Sub command Description

1A 050190 Set/read FFT scope averaging set

for RTTY decoder (0=OFF, 1=2,

2=3, 3=4)

050191 Set/read FFT scope waveform

color set for RTTY decoder

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050192 Set/read FFT scope averaging set

for PSK decoder (0=OFF, 1=2,

2=3, 3=4)

050193 Set/read FFT scope waveform

color set for PSK decoder

(see p. 14-10 for details)

050194 Set/read PSK AFC function tuning

range (0=±8 Hz, 1=±15 Hz)

06 Send/read DATA mode with filter

set (see p. 14-10 for detail)

07 Send/read SSB transmit band-

width (0=WIDE, 1=MID, 2=NAR)

08 Send/read DSP filter shape

(0= sharp, 1= soft)

09 Send/read roofing filter set

(0=6 kHz, 1=15 kHz)

0A Send/read manual notch width

(0=Wide, 1=Mid., 2=Nar.)

10 Send/read lock function set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

1B 00 Set/read repeater tone frequency

(see p. 14-10 for details)

01 Set/read TSQL tone frequency

(see p. 14-10 for details)

1C 00 Set/read the transceiver’s condi-

tion (0=Rx; 1=Tx)

01 Set/read antenna tuner condition

(0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=Start tuning or

while tuning)

14-9

CONTROL COMMAND

To send/read memory contents

When sending or reading memory contents, additional

code must be added to appoint the memory channel

as follows.

➥ Additional code: 0000–0101 (0100=P1, 0101=P2)

Band stacking register

To send or read the desired band stacking register’s

contents, combined codes of the frequency band and

For example, when sending/reading the oldest con-

tents in the 21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.

• Frequency band code

• Register code

Codes for memory keyer contents

To send or read the desired memory keyer contents,

the channel and character codes as follows are used.

• Channel code

• Character’s code

Codes for memory name, opening

message and clock 2 name contents

To send or read the desired memory name settings,

the character codes, instructed codes for memory

keyer contents as above, and follows are additionally

used.

• Character’s code— Alphabetical characters

• Character’s code— Symbols

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

a–z 61–7A — —

Code Frequency band Frequency range (unit: MHz)

01 1.8 1.800000– 1.999999

02 3.5 3.400000– 4.099999

03 7 6.900000– 7.499999

04 10 9.900000–10.499999

05 14 13.900000–14.499999

06 18 17.900000–18.499999

07 21 20.900000–21.499999

08 24 24.400000–25.099999

09 28 28.000000–29.999999

10 50 50.000000–54.000000

12 GENE Other than above

Code Registered number

01 1 (latest)

02 2

03 3 (oldest)

Character ASCII code Description

0–9 30–39 Numerals

A–Z 41–5A Alphabetical characters

space 20 Word space

/ 2F Symbol

? 3F Symbol

, 2C Symbol

. 2E Symbol

^ 5E e.g., to send

BT, enter ^4254

✱ 2A Inserts contest number (can be

used for 1 channel only)

Code Channel number

01 M1

02 M2

03 M3

04 M4

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

!21#23

$24%25

&26¥5C

?3F ” 22

’27`60

+2B–2D

:3A;3B

=3D<3C

>3E ( 28

)29[5B

]5D{7B

}7D|7C

_5F

–

@40

14-10

CONTROL COMMAND

Offset frequency setting

The following data sequence is used when sending or

reading the offset frequency setting.

Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency

setting

The following data sequence is used when sending or

reading the tone frequency setting.

SSB transmission passband width

setting

The following data sequence is used when sending or

reading the SSB transmission passband width setting.

Color setting

The following data sequence is used when sending or

reading the color setting.

Bandscope edge frequency setting

The following data sequence is used when sending or

reading the bandscope edge frequency setting.

Data mode with filter width setting

The following data sequence is used when sending or

reading the data mode with filter width setting.

Antenna memory setting

The following codes are used when sending or read-

ing the antenna memory setting.

0=ANT1, 1=ANT2, 2=ANT3, 3=ANT4,

4*=TX: ANT1, RX: ANT4, 5*=TX: ANT2, RX: ANT4,

6*=TX: ANT3, RX: ANT4

*RX should be selected for ANT4

XXXX

00=Data mode OFF

01=FIL1

02=FIL2

03=FIL3

00=Data mode OFF

01=Data mode 1 (D1)

02=Data mode 2 (D2)

03=Data mode 3 (D3)

1 kHz: 0–9

100 Hz: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz: 0–9

10 kHz: 0–9

10 MHz: 0–6

1 MHz: 0–9

1 kHz: 0–9

100 Hz: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz: 0–9

10 kHz: 0–9

10 MHz: 0–6

1 MHz: 0–9

XXXXXXXXXXXX

werty

Lower edge Higher edge

1000

100

0XXX0XXX0XXX

werty

1000

100

1000

100

R (Red) G (Green) B (Blue)

Using 0000–0255 for each color element.

Higher edge: 0=2500 Hz

1=2700 Hz

2=2800 Hz

3=2900 Hz

Lower edge: 0=100 Hz

1=200 Hz

2=300 Hz

3=500 Hz

100Hz digit: 0–2

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

0.1 Hz digit: 0–9

Fixed digit: 0*

00XXX

*Not necessary when setting a frequency.

1 kHz digit: 0–9

100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz digit: 0–9

10 kHz digit: 0–9

10 MHz digit: 0–9

†

1 MHz digit: 0–4

Direction:

00=+ direction

01=– direction

0XXXXXX

*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.

†

Transverter offset only; Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.

15-1

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 15

■ Specifications ………………………………………………………… 15-2

D General ……………………………………………………………… 15-2

D Transmitter ………………………………………………………… 15-2

D Receiver …………………………………………………………… 15-3

D Antenna tuner ……………………………………………………… 15-3

■ Options ………………………………………………………………… 15-4

15-2

■ Specifications

General

• Frequency coverage (unit: MHz) :

Receiver 0.030000–60.000000*

Transmitter 1.800000–1.999999*

, 3.500000–3.999999*

5.330500*

, 5.346500*

, 5.366500*

, 5.371500*

5.403500*

, 7.000000–7.300000*

10.100000–10.150000*

, 14.000000–14.350000*

18.068000–18.168000*

, 21.000000–21.450000*

24.890000–24.990000*

, 28.000000–29.700000*

50.000000–54.000000*

Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed.

Depending on versions. *

USA version only.

• Operating mode : USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, AM, FM

• Number of memory channels : 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)

• Antenna connector : SO-239×4 (antenna impedance: 50 Ω)

• Operating temperature range : 0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to +122˚F

• Frequency stability : Less than ±0.05 ppm (approx. 5 min. after from turn

the main power, [I/O], ON, 0–50˚C; 32–122˚F)

• Frequency resolution : 1Hz

• Power supply requirement : 85–265 V AC (universal input)

• Power consumption :

Power OFF Stand-by 10 VA typical

Receive Stand-by 200 VA typical

Max. audio 210 VA typical

Transmit at 200 W 800 VA

• Dimensions (projections not included) : 424×149×435 mm; 16

⁄

×5

⁄

×17

⁄

16 in

• Weight : Approx. 25 kg; 55 lb

• ACC 1 connectors : 8-pin DIN connector×2

• ACC 2 connectors : 7-pin DIN connector×2

• Display* : 7-inch (diagonal) TFT color LCD (800×480)

• EXT-DISPLAY connector : D-sub 15S

• CI-V connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄

″)

• RS-232C connector : D-sub 9-pin

• KEYBOARD connector : USB

Transmitter

• Transmit output power :

SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, FM 5–200 W

AM 5–50 W

137 kHz band More than –20 dBm (Except for USA and Korean versions)

• Modulation system :

SSB P.S.N. modulation

AM Low power modulation

FM Phase modulation

• Spurious emission : More than 60 dB (HF bands)

More than 70 dB (50 MHz band)

• Carrier suppression : More than 63 dB (HF bands)

More than 73 dB (50 MHz band)

• Unwanted side-band suppression : More than 80 dB

•

∂∂

TX variable range : ±9.999 kHz

• Microphone connector : 8-pin connector (600 Ω)

• ELEC-KEY connector : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄4″)

• KEY connector : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄4″)

• RELAY connector : Phono (RCA)

• ALC connector : Phono (RCA)

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

15-3

Receiver

• Receive system : Double conversion superheterodyne system

• Intermediate frequencies :

1st 64.455 MHz (MAIN band)

64.555 MHz (SUB band)

2nd 36 kHz

• Sensitivity :

SSB, CW, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz, 10 dB S/N)

0.100–1.799 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

1.800–29.990 MHz 0.16 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000–54.000 MHz 0.13 µV

(pre-amp 2 ON)

AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N)

0.100–1.799 MHz 6.3 µV

(pre-amp 1 ON)

1.800–29.990 MHz 2 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000–54.000 MHz 1 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)

FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)

28.000–29.990 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000–54.000 MHz 0.32 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)

• Selectivity :

SSB, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/–3 dB

Less than 3.6 kHz/–60 dB

CW (BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–3 dB

Less than 700 Hz/–60 dB

AM (BW=6 kHz) More than 6.0 kHz/–3 dB

Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB

FM (BW=15 kHz) More than 12.0 kHz/–3 dB

Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB

• Spurious and image rejection ratio : More than 70 dB

(except IF through on 50 MHz band)

• Squelch sensitivity :

SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31 Less than 5.6 µV

FM Less than 1 µV

• RIT variable range : ±9.999 kHz

• Audio output power : More than 2.6 W

at 10% distortion with an 8 Ω load

• PHONES connector : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄

″)

• EXT-SP connectors : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄8″)/8 Ω×2 (for main and

sub)

Antenna tuner

• Matching impedance range : 16.7 to 150 Ω unbalanced

(HF bands; VSWR better than 3:1)

20 to 125 Ω unbalanced

(50 MHz band; VSWR better than 2.5:1)

• Minimum operating input : 8W (HF bands)

15 W (50 MHz band)

• Tuning accuracy : VSWR 1.5:1 or less

• Insertion loss (after tuning) : Less than 1.0 dB

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

*The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots. This is not a malfunction

or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays.

Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit and does

not indicate a transceiver malfunction.

• 0.150 MHz • 10.490 MHz

All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation.

15-4

■ Options

• IC-PW1/EURO HF

/50

ALL BAND

W LINEAR AMPLIFIER

Full-duty-cycle 1 kW linear amplifier including an auto-

matic antenna tuner. Has automatic tuning and band

selection capability when used with an Icom trans-

ceiver. Full break-in (QSK) operation. The

amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit

are separate.

• SM-20 DESKTOP MICROPHONE

Unidirectional, electret microphone for base station

operation. Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a low

cut function.

• CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER

For remote transceiver control using a PC. You can

change frequencies, operating mode, memory chan-

nels, etc. (software is not included)

• SP-20 EXTERNAL SPEAKER

4 audio filters; headphone jack; can connect to 2

transceivers.

• Input impedance : 8 Ω

• Max. input power : 5 W

• HM-36 HAND MICROPHONE

Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/[DOWN] switch-

es.

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

16-1

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 16

■ General ………………………………………………………………… 16-2

■ Caution ………………………………………………………………… 16-2

■ Preparation …………………………………………………………… 16-3

D Firmware and firm utility …………………………………………… 16-3

D File downloading …………………………………………………… 16-3

■ Firmware update— CF memory card ……………………………… 16-4

■ Firmware update— PC ……………………………………………… 16-6

D Connections ………………………………………………………… 16-6

D IP address setting ………………………………………………… 16-7

D Updating from the PC ……………………………………………… 16-8

16-2

■ General

The IC-7800’s firmware can be updated if desired.

By updating the firmware, new function(s) can be

added and the improvement of performance parame-

ters can be made.

2 ways of firmware update are available; one is using

the CF memory card, and the other is using a PC.

You can choose either way according to your PC con-

dition.

• When only one PC that is connected to internet is

available

➥ Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 16-3) and ■ Firmware

update— CF memory card (p. 16-4)

• When two or more PCs that are connected to inter-

net are available and they are connected to the LAN

(Local Area Network)

➥ Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 16-3) and either

■ Firmware update— PC (p. 16-6) or

■ Firmware update— CF memory card (p. 16-4)

Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the

firmware if you have no PC.

■ Caution

R CAUTION!: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF

while updating the firmware.

You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when the

transceiver displays that rebooting is required.

If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power fail-

ure occurs during updating, the transceiver firmware

will be damaged and you have to send the transceiver

back to the nearest Icom distributor for repair. This type

of repair is out of warranty even if the warranty period

is still valid.

Recommendation!

Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to the

CF memory card before starting the firmware update

is recommended.

Settings and/or memory contents will be lost when the

firmware update is performed.

A memory card reader is required to copy the down-

loaded firmware file.

An Ethernet card/board (10 BASE-T/100 BASE TX

compatible) is required when updating the firmware

from the PC.

Both memory card reader and Ethernet card/board

are not supplied from Icom.

Ask your PC dealer about a memory card reader

and an Ethernet card/board for details.

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-3

■ Preparation

Firmware and firm utility

The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down-

loaded from the Icom home page via the internet. Ac-

cess the following URL to download the firm utility and

the latest firmware.

http://www.icom.co.jp/world/download/index.htm

For updating from the CF memory card

When updating the firmware from the CF memory

card, copy the downloaded firmware data (e.g.

7800_110.dat)

to the CF memory card (in “IC-7800” folder)

using a memory card reader (purchased separately from

your PC dealer).

File downloading

q Access the following URL directly.

http://www.icom.co.jp/world/download/index.htm

• No link is available from the top page.

w Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,

then click [AGREE].

e Click “IC-7800” link then click the firmware file link.

r Type your name, call sign, IC-7800’s serial number,

etc., then click [OK?].

t Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog.

y Select the desired location that you want to save the

firmware to, then click [Save] in the displayed File

Download dialog.

• File download starts.

u After download is completed, extract the file.

• The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in “zip”

format, respectively.

• When updating the transceiver using with the CF mem-

ory card, copy the extracted firmware (e.g.

7800_110.dat) to the CF memory card IC-7800 folder.

• The CF memory card must be formatted with the IC-

7800.

Select the saving

location

Click

Read carefully

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-4

■ Firmware update— CF memory card

When updating the firmware using with the CF mem-

ory card, no IP address as well as subnet mask set-

tings are necessary.

q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the CF

memory card (“IC-7800” folder).

• The CF memory card must be formatted by the IC-7800.

w Insert the CF memory card into the CF card slot.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

r Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

t Push [F-7•CF CARD] to select CF card set menu.

y Push [F-3•FIRM UP] for 1 sec.

u Read the displayed precaution carefully.

• Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to scroll the indication.

• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.

i After you read and agree to all of the precautions,

push [F-6•OK].

• [F-6•OK] appears only when the end of the precaution

is displayed.

• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.

o Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the firmware file,

then push [F-4•FIRM UP].

!0 Read the displayed precaution carefully.

!1 If you agree, push [F-6•OK] for 1 sec. to start the

firmware update.

• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.

!2 While loading the firmware from the CF memory

card, the dialog as at left is displayed.

[F-1•Y]/[F-1•DIR/FILE]

[F-3•FIRM UP]/[F-3•Z]

[F-6•OK]

[F-7•SET]/[F-7•CF CARD]

/[F-7•CANCEL]

[F-2•Z]/[F-2•Y] [F-4•FIRM UP]

[EXIT/SET]

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-5

!3 After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-

ceiver starts the update automatically and the dialog

as at left is displayed.

RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7800 power

OFF at this stage.

The transceiver firmware will be damaged.

!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution as at

left is displayed.

!5 Read the precaution carefully, and then push

[F-6•OK].

• Return to CF card set menu.

!6 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-7800 power OFF,

then ON again.

!7 Depending on the updating, one to four dialog as at

left appears in sequence.

RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7800 power

OFF at this stage.

The transceiver firmware will be damaged.

!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updating

is completed and normal operation screen appears.

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-6

■ Firmware update— PC

Connections Connect the IC-7800 and the PC through a LAN (Local

Area Network) as follows.

= × × × ×

*Purchased separately

to WAN

/Internet network

Ethernet cable*

(Patch cable)

to crossover port

• IP address setting example

Hub/Router*

IC-7800 (192.168.100.13)

PC1

(192.168.100.11)

PC2

(192.168.100.12)

PC1

192.168.100.11

255.255.255.0

IP address

Subnet mask

PC2

192.168.100.12

255.255.255.0

IC-7800

192.168.100.13

255.255.255.0

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-7

IP address setting

IMPORTANT!: A fixed (static) IP address is used for

the IC-7800.

When you connect the IC-7800 to a LAN, ask the

network manager about a usable/assignable IP

address and the subnet mask in advance.

NEVER set the IP address that has already been

used with another device in the network. If the IP

address is duplicated, the network will crash down.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-

function screen, if necessary.

w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.

e Push [F-5•OTHERS] to select miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

r Push [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z] several times to select “IP Ad-

dress” item.

t Push [F-3•Ω≈] to select the desired part then ro-

tate main dial to set the desired or specified IP ad-

dress.

• “192.168.0.1” is the default setting.

y Push [F-2•Z] to select “Subnet Mask” item.

u Rotate main dial to set the desired or specified sub-

net mask.

• “255.255.255.0” is the default setting.

i Push [POWER] to turn the transceiver power OFF,

then ON to effect the IP address and subnet mask

settings.

[F-1•Y]

[F-3•Ω ≈]

[F-5•OTHERS]

[F-7•SET]

[F-2•Z] [EXIT/SET]

When updating the firmware from the CF memory

card, the following settings are not necessary.

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-8

Updating from the PC

q Start up the IC-7800 Firm Utility.

• The window as at left appears.

w Read the caution in the window carefully.

e Click [Yes] if you agree and continue the firmware

updating.

r Select the firmware file, that has “dat” extension

(e.g.: 7800_110.dat).

• Click […], then select the file, as well as the location.

t Type the IC-7800’s IP address into “IC-7800 IP Ad-

dress” text box.

y Click [Start].

u The window as at left appears.

Read the precaution in the window carefully.

i Click [Yes] if you want to start the firmware update.

Click to start the

firmware update

Click […] to select the firmware file.

Type the IC-7800’s IP address here.

Click to

continue

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16-9

o The screen as at left is displayed.

• The following dialog appears in the IC-7800 display.

RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7800 power

OFF at this stage.

The transceiver firmware will be damaged.

!0 Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.

• The “FIRMWARE UPDATING” dialog as above disap-

pears.

!1 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-7800 power OFF,

then ON again.

!2 Depending on the updating, one to four dialogs as

at left appears in the IC-7800 display in sequence.

RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7800 power

OFF at this stage.

The transceiver firmware will be damaged.

!3 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updating

is completed and normal operation screen appears.

Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

INSTALLATION NOTES

For amateur base station installations it is recom-

mended that the forwards clearance in front of the an-

tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective

Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below

the antenna array can be determined in most cases

from the RF power at the antenna input terminals.

Different exposure limits have been recommended for

different frequencies, a relative table shows a guide-

line for installation considerations.

Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified

in terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are likely to fall

within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas

may be physically short in terms of electrical length

and that the installation will require some antenna

matching device which can create local, high intensity

magnetic fields. Analysis of such installations is best

considered in association with published guidance

notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01

and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter instal-

lations. The EC recommended limits are almost identi-

cal to the FCC specified ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables

exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for differ-

ent antenna types for different frequency bands. Fur-

ther information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.

• Typical amateur radio installation

Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-

diation pattern is forward and that radiation vertically

downward is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is

equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every

gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed to

be beneath the antenna array and have a typical

height of 1.8 m.

The figures assume the worst-case emission of con-

stant carrier.

For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power

density limits have been recommended:

10–144 MHz 2 W/sq m

EIRP clearance heights by frequency band

1 Watts 2.1 m

10 Watts 2.8 m

25 Watts 3.4 m

100 Watts 5 m

1000 Watts 12 m

Forward clearance, EIRP by frequency band

100 Watts 2 m

1000 Watts 6.5 m

10,000 Watts 20 m

100,000 Watts 65 m

In all cases any possible risk depends on the transmit-

ter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-

mendation limits are specified as an average during 6

minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long

periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a

timer circuit automatically cuts the transmitter after 1–2

minutes etc.

Similarly some types of emission, i.e., SSB, CW, AM

etc. have a lower ‘average’ output power and the as-

sessed risk is even lower.

Versions of the IC-7800 which display the

“CE” symbol on the serial number seal,

comply with the essential requirements of

the European Radio and Telecommunication

Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC.

This warning symbol indicates that this

equipment operates in non-harmonised fre-

quency bands and/or may be subject to li-

censing conditions in the country of use. Be

sure to check that you have the correct ver-

sion of this radio or the correct programming

of this radio, to comply with national licens-

ing requirement.

ABOUT CE

DECLARATION

OF CONFORMITY

We Icom Inc. Japan

1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku

Osaka 547-0003, Japan

Kind of equipment: HF/

50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER

This compliance is based on conformity according to Annex III of the

directive 1999/5/EC using the following harmonised standards:

i) Article 3.1a EN 60950 + A11

ii) Article 3.1b EN 301489-1 and EN 301489-15

iii) Article 3.2 EN 301 783-2

iv)

Type-designation: i7800

Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the

essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal

Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test

Suite measurements have been performed.

Version (where applicable):

Signature

T. Maebayashi

General Manager

Authorized representative name

Icom (Europe) GmbH

Himmelgeister straße 100

D-40225 Düsseldorf

Place and date of issue

Düsseldorf 27th Feb. 2004

Please record the serial number of your IC-7800 transceiver below for future servicing

reference:

Serial Number :

Date of purchase :

Place where purchased :

1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

■ GER ■■ FRA ■■ ESP ■ SWE

■ AUT ■ NED ■■ POR ■ DEN

■■ GBR ■ BEL ■■ ITA ■ FIN

■ IRL ■ LUX ■ GRE ■■ SUI

■■ NOR

IC-7800

#03 (Europe)

■■ GER ■ FRA ■■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR ■■ DEN

■■ GBR ■■ BEL ■■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE ■■ SUI

■■ NOR

IC-7800

#04 (France)

■■ GER ■■ FRA ■■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR ■■ DEN

■ GBR ■■ BEL ■■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE ■■ SUI

■■ NOR

IC-7800

#10 (United

Kingdom)

■■ GER ■■ FRA ■■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR ■■ DEN

■■ GBR ■■ BEL ■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE ■■ SUI

■■ NOR

IC-7800

#06 (Italy)

■■ GER ■■ FRA ■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■ POR ■■ DEN

■■ GBR ■■ BEL ■■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE ■■ SUI

■■ NOR

IC-7800

#08 (Spain)

Icom IC-7800 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info